Sacrifice And Liberty
Series: New Jerusalem
Publisher: Faisal Fransu
Published: 2012
Table of contents: title: Sacrifice And Liberty; title: By Faisal Fransu; title: From Faisal Fransu to the readers; title: Dear reader,; title: I would like to give you some information regarding this novel. As you can see at the top of the page, the title of this novel is ‘Sacrifice And Liberty.’ This novel belongs to a series of three novels called ‘New Jerusalem.’ However, I will not continue the series unless I get positive comments concerning this novel.; title: The genre of the whole series is what I would call ‘Supernatural’ novel. It documents a lot of supernatural interventions in everyday life. There are also few visions.; title: This novel and the rest of the series is a Christian trilogy. It was written especially for Evangelicals. So if you are not Christian or an Evangelical, you might not enjoy it as much. Nevertheless, I tried not to attack other religions.; title: I give you permission to copy it and give it to others to read it. I want to let people to read it for free. So you must give it to them for free. However, you shall not change even a dot. It shall stay exactly as I posted it on the internet.; title: Finally, I dedicate this novel to:; title: -	My bus driver, who used to ask me how many pages I’ve written so far,; title: -	My educational assistant, who gave me few ideas for the rest of the series,; title: -	And to anyone who will read it.; title: If you have questions or comments, please email me at:; title: faisalfransu@gmail.com; title: I would love to hear from you!; title: Enjoy!; title: Faisal Fransu; title: About This Novel; title: This is the first novel in the “New Jerusalem” Series.; title: At first, I thought about writing only one long novel. But then I realized that it would take me forever to finish it.  I wanted to make it available to the public as soon as possible. Therefore, I decided to divide the story into smaller novels.; title: What inspired me to start this series?; title: Well, I read all seven novels of the “Harry Potter” series.  So I wanted to write something similar to that. I was fascinated in the world of Harry Potter. But the challenge was that I was an Evangelical Christian. Therefore, I couldn’t write about magic, since it’s against the Bible.; title: But then I came up with an interesting idea: instead of magic, I will use God’s power to do impossible things.; title: So then I started thinking about a new world.  That wasn’t too hard. I called its name “New Jerusalem,” after the Biblical city of New Jerusalem, because it was so beautiful, rich and advanced in technology. So it was almost like Heaven.; title: After I made up a world, however, it was very hard to make up a story that happened in that world. So I started thinking about an interesting story.; title: Another challenge was that if this world is the best place to live in, then there is no evil there. So how can I have evil characters? Finally, I came up with an idea, which I cannot tell it to you now. Read the novel and see for yourself!; title: So I began writing on February 7, 2012.; title: Chapters:; title: This novel is divided into 19 chapters. Here is a little description of each one of them.; title: Chapter 1: The Miraculous Baby. This title means that there’s an unusual baby.; title: Chapter 2: The Voice From Nowhere. The main character, Joshua David, heard a voice which he didn’t know where it came from.; title: Chapter 3: The Truth. Joshua David learns the truth about himself from Brother Noah.; title: Chapter 4: The Best Birthday. Joshua’s 12th birthday was the best birthday that he had ever celebrated.; title: Chapter 5: The Two Communities Of The Same Building. Brother Noah explains to Joshua about the two communities of the Holy Community Building.; title: Chapter 6: Traveling To The Other World: Joshua leaves Canada for New Jerusalem.; title: Chapter 7: The Holy Community Building. Joshua is now in the country of New Jerusalem.; title: Chapter 8: The First Miracle. Joshua uses Jesus’s name in front of a Devilist.; title: Chapter 9: Beelzebub. Joshua, John and Emily read an article about Beelzebub.; title: Chapter 10: How It All Happened. Joshua finds out how his parents were murdered.; title: Chapter 11: The Christmas Surprise. I cannot tell you anything about this chapter, because you’ll know what happened.; title: Chapter 12: The First Practice. This chapter talks about Joshua’s first practice fighting against evil spirits in one of the Devilist sections.; title: Chapter 13: The Vision. This chapter talks about the vision that Joshua had while he was in one of the rooms of the Church Area.; title: Chapter 14: The same Miracle Repeated. This chapter talks about Joshua fighting Beelzebub in one of the Devilist rooms.; title: Chapter 15: The Big Party. Everyone is celebrating Joshua’s victory against Beelzebub in the King’s Palace.; title: Chapter 16: Preparations For Entry Sunday. The people of the Holy Community Building are preparing to celebrate ‘Entry Sunday,’ which we call ‘Palm Sunday.’; title: Chapter 17: The Festival Of The Resurrection. This chapter contains a series of miracles that took place during the Festival Of The Resurrection, which is known in this world as Easter.; title: Chapter 18: In The Dark Place. That’s when Joshua and John go to sacrifice their lives to save Brother Benjamin.; title: Chapter 19: Conclusion. Joshua returns to Canada to stay with the Bakers for a week.; title: I would like to let you know that:; title: 1.	I’m blind.; title: 2.	 My English is not perfect. So I don’t have a lot of description of things. That was the main challenge in writing this novel.; title: Finally, I hope that you’ll enjoy this novel!; title: Chapter 1; title: The Miraculous Baby; title: We are now in the twenty third century of the Christian era.  The world has changed, but not too much.  The population is now twenty-four billion souls.; title: Canada is almost the same as in the twenty-first century.  The new Prime Minister is Mr. Thomas Lindsey. The population of Canada is fifty-three million.; title: In the year of our Lord 2201, there lived a family in Hamilton, Ontario.  They were made up of Mr. William Baker, and his wife, Mrs.  Allison Baker. Together, they have a one-year old son, Jack.; title: Mr. Baker was larger in size, and he was very tall in height. He always wore old dirty garments.  He was a nasty looking man, with short hair. His aggressive and controlling personality scared anyone away in his path.   He always looked angry.  In fact, you did not need to see him to know that he was always angry, because you could tell from his voice.; title: He was born on January the sixteenth, 2175.  His father and mother worked at a bank in Hamilton.; title: His marks at school were not very good.  Therefore, he graduated from high school with a diploma, and did not pursue post-secondary education. That’s why he worked as a teller, at the same bank as his parents.; title: One day, Mr. Baker as at a bar with his friends.  He was drinking and having a lot of fun, when   suddenly, his eyes fell on an unattractive girl.  However, he did not think that she was nasty at all.  So he fell in love with her.  He was about twenty-three years, and she was only seventeen when this happened.; title: Two months later, they got married.; title: Mrs. Allison Baker was six years younger than her husband.  She got married when she was seventeen.; title: She was not beautiful at all. She had a very dirty face. Her hair reached the floor.; title: She did not know how to clean properly.  If truth be told, her neighbors often said that they were afraid to eat from her food, because they thought that it would make them sick.; title: Jack was born on March the fifteenth, 2200. He looked mostly like his father, but he had very short hair because he was still a baby at that time. His parents often said about him that he was the best-looking child in the whole world.  They said this however, for no reason.; title: The Bakers had other children, but they were dead when Jack was born.  Their names were Olivia and Jeff.  Both of them were murdered on the same day. The police looked everywhere for the murderer, but they could not find one.; title: The Bakers lived in a large-four-bedroom house.  This house included the room where Mr. and Mrs. Baker slept, a room for Jack, one room for visitors and the other one was empty. Jack and his parents slept in the two rooms located on the first floor of their home.  The other two rooms were upstairs.; title: Their house had a big, disorganized kitchen, because Mrs. Baker was not good with cleaning her house.  There was stuff all over the floor. Therefore, they did not get many visitors.; title: Even their bathroom was not clean at all.; title: They had a garage, where Mr. Baker parked his car.  Their visitors would park their cars in that same garage, because it was big enough to hold five cars.; title: The Baker family was not religious.  They did not belong to any religious denomination or movement.  They never participated in any religious activities. Their only goal in life was, as Mr. Baker said, “eat and drink because tomorrow we’ll die.”; title: Mr. Baker worked at a store that sold computers and pianos. As mentioned, he worked with his parents at a bank when he was young.  Now, however, he decided to work at another store.; title: Mrs. Baker, however, was too lazy to work.  So she stayed home and took care of Jack. She also cleaned the house, although she wasn’t very good at it.; title: She had a sister named Mary, but she hated her, because Mary converted to Christianity. She never mentioned her to anyone. Even when she would count her brothers and sisters, she would always exclude Mary.; title: One day, which was March the thirteenth, 2201, Mrs. Baker was outside when she looked up and saw something strange.  It was a car flying.  So she rushed into the house and screamed, “William!  O my!  Come with me!”; title: “Are you ok?”Mr. Baker asked, running after her.; title: She yelled, “Come! Come and see what I saw!”; title: “What is it?” Asked Mr. Baker, trying to keep up with her.; title: After they were both outside, Mrs. Baker told him to look up.; title: “A car flying?” Said Mr. Baker, with confusion.; title: Two minutes later, the car had disappeared.; title: “Crazy stuff…” said Mr. Baker, as they went back into the house.  “Maybe we were dreaming.”; title: The next morning, Mr. Baker woke up at six o’clock. He was the first person to wake up that morning.  Then he started reading the newspaper as usual.  But there was something strange in the newspaper that morning. The article that interested him the most was this one:; title: In the country of New Jerusalem, there was a magician named Beelzebub. He was the most devil worshiper in the whole world.  Many people think that he’s the biggest and the strongest magician in the world.   He was even called, ‘The King of Magic.’; title: He was also the most evil and hateful person in the world.  Some people called him ‘Hitler the Magician.’; title: This magician wanted to get into New Jerusalem, because it was the richest and the most beautiful country in the whole world, but he was unable, because only Evangelical Christians live there.  So he got angry and was planning to enter anyway.  He did enter but no one knew how.  Even the Jerusalemite police could not explain it.; title: Because he was so angry with the people of New Jerusalem, he started murdering many of them after he had entered the country secretly.; title: He looks for a place where one person is alone, and then he goes to kill that person.  Then he flees to some unknown location, so that the police would not be able to catch him.; title: No one has ever seen him in the country. Some say that he can change how he looks, so that no one would be able to find him.; title: He also has many followers which are known as ‘Satanic Soldiers.’ They are spiritual terrorists, or Satanic terrorists.  They work for him secretly in New Jerusalem.; title: Last week, Beelzebub killed Joseph and Mary David, a small family who lived in the Holy Community Building, in the city of Heaven.  But he was unable to kill their son, Joshua, who is only six months old.; title: No one knows exactly what happened, but by the power of the Holy Spirit, a man of God said that after Beelzebub tried to kill Joshua, he lost all his magical powers. But the Man of God also said that Beelzebub is not dead, but he is hiding, and he’s powerless.  However, there will come a day when all of his powers will be restored to him. As of now, some say that his followers are still working for him.; title: So it’s likely that they would be working in some unknown location in New Jerusalem to murder people that are more innocent.; title: The Jerusalemite police however, have confirmed that few Satanic Soldiers have been arrested. [Hamilton Newspaper Section 5]; title: After he finished reading this long section of the newspaper, Mr. Baker threw the newspaper in the recycle bin and went to wake up his wife.; title: “What is the name of your sister’s husband?” he asked, shaking with fear.; title: “Umm…” she opened her eyes.; title: “Joseph David.”; title: “Where did they live?” Now he was more curious.; title: “Oh…” Mrs. Baker sat up. “They lived in that crazy Christian country called New Jerusalem, I guess,” She was laughing when she said this.; title: “Do you want to see your sister?” Asked Mr. Baker, almost crying.; title: “Do you think that I want to see her?” She answered angrily.; title: “Who want to see those crazy Christians?  They’re always talking about the blood of the Lamb.  They’re proud of their Lamb, I guess?”; title: Mr. Baker looked at her and said, “Your sister is dead!”; title: Then he showed her the newspaper, because he had another copy in the bedroom.  After she finished reading it, she laughed and said, “Do you think that I would cry when my enemy is dead?  That woman became my enemy when she converted to Christianity.  And to add to my anger, she married that man from that crazy country.  They say that it’s the most beautiful country in the whole world. If that was true, then why didn’t she force them to let me go to that beautiful country? So that proves that she hated me.”; title: “Because you’re not an Evangelical,” answered Mr. Baker, very loudly. “Only Evangelicals can live there! And she’s still your sister! You can’t hate her just because she converted to another religion.”; title: “My sister?” laughed Mrs. Baker.; title: “Crazy sister. Well she got what she deserved.  She’s dead. She always told me that if I would not believe in her God, I would go to hell after I die! So is this love?”; title: That afternoon, which was March the third, there was another flying car coming toward their house. There was a man and a woman in that car, but none of them was flying the car.  It was flying on its own.; title: Then the woman turned to the man and said, “You still haven’t told me where we’re going, sir.”; title: He looked at her and said with a soft voice, “Listen Sister Bianca.  We are taking Joshua David to his aunt’s house.”; title: “But they hate his parents!” answered the woman called Bianca. “And I’m sure that they hate him too!”; title: “I know,” replied the man painfully.; title: “But I asked the Lord to help me with this issue, and he sent his prophet, Pastor Moses to me.  He told me that I should send Joshua to his aunt’s house, because she’s his closest relative.  The Lord also wants Joshua to experience both worlds, because his parents lived in both worlds. Joshua belongs to both worlds.; title: But by the time that he’s able to go to high school, we don’t want to educate him in that poor world.  So we’ll take him back to New Jerusalem to be educated in Biblical studies.; title: Also, Joshua will be very safe with his relatives because Beelzebub doesn’t know where he is.  And therefore, he won’t be able to find him.; title: I’m sure that you know how much Beelzebub hates Joshua. Of course, you know why.  It was because he lost his magical powers when he tried to kill him.  So of course he wants revenge.”; title: “Sir,” asked Sister Bianca,” Have you heard anything about Beelzebub then?”; title: “Well,” replied the man,”  “No one knows where he is.  The only thing that we know is that he lost all his magical powers, and he’s hiding somewhere. We don’t know whether he’s hiding in New Jerusalem or not, but some say that his followers are working in New Jerusalem to slaughter more of our people.”; title: “What about the rest of his followers?” asked Sister Bianca.; title: “Well, they’re hiding as well, I suppose. But our police have arrested few of them. Nevertheless, they’re unable to tell us where he is though.”; title: After fifteen minutes of flying, the car was parked near the Baker’s house.; title: The man who was in the car looked about fifty or fifty-five years of age.; title: The woman who was called Bianca looked about 20 to 25 years old.  She was very pretty.  She had long and blond hair.; title: She was carrying a baby boy wrapped in a red blanket. He was asleep.; title: “Too bad Joshua will have to stay with them,” said Bianca sadly.; title: “I know,” replied the man. “But what can we do about it?”; title: Then they knocked on the Baker’s door. Next, the door was opened and there stood Mr. Baker, looking very scared.; title: “Don’t worry, Mr. Baker,” said the man from the car.; title: “My name is Brother Noah.  I’m the leader of the Holy Community Building, which contains the school where Mr. and Mrs. David went to. It also contains the place where they lived. So anyway, we’ve come to visit you, because we have something very important for you. And this is Sister Bianca Adam,” He pointed at the woman standing next to him.; title: “She takes my place when I’m not in the building.”; title: Mr. Baker, however, didn’t shake their hands.; title: “So come in please,” he said gloomily.; title: They entered the Baker’s house.  But the baby that Sister Bianca was carrying was still asleep.; title: “So are you from New Jerusalem?” asked Mr. Baker, trying to sound friendly.; title: “Yes we are,” replied Brother Noah, smiling.; title: “I read in a newspaper that the Davids, except their son, are dead.  Is that right?”; title: “Yes they are,” said Brother Noah sadly.; title: “I suppose that you know the whole story then?”; title: “Well yes…” replied Mr. Baker miserably.; title: “So,” said Brother Noah. “We’ve decided to bring Joshua to stay with you until he’s 12, but then we’ll have to take him to our system of school when he’s 12 years old.; title: The reason why we’re bringing him to live with you is that he must experience both worlds, just like his parents.; title: Another reason why we brought him to you is that Beelzebub and his followers are very furious with him, since Beelzebub lost all his powers when he tried to kill him.; title: So we think that he’ll be safe with you, as it’s unlikely that Satanic Soldiers would come to look for him here in Canada. They’re looking for him now in New Jerusalem, I believe. So I think that by the time he’s 11 or 12 years old, they would probably give up trying to find him. But I demand that you take care of him like your son. You can even let him go to school until we take him.”; title: He paused to see if anyone had anything to say, and then he said to Sister Bianca, “Please kiss him goodbye before we go.”; title: And she did.  Then she started crying for him, for she would not be able to see him until the age of 12.; title: Brother Noah got up. “Well,” he said, “It was very nice meeting you.”; title: But the Bakers didn’t look at him.  Instead, they were looking at baby Joshua, who was laid on the couch beside Mrs. Baker. Brother Noah then put a letter beside the baby.; title: “Well goodbye,” Said Brother Noah, opening the door and letting Sister Bianca go first.; title: Again, they didn’t look at him.  Instead, Mr. Baker called, “Please shut the door behind you!”; title: Then Mr. Baker looked at his wife and said, “Well now we have someone for Jack to play with.”; title: She looked at him furiously and answered, “What? Do you think that I would let my beloved Jack play with this nasty child?”; title: Then Mr. Baker looked at baby Joshua who was awake now, and said, “He looks exactly the same as I saw him in the picture in that newspaper!; title: I think that he’s very dangerous for us, because everyone thinks that he’s special.; title: So what do you think that we should do concerning him?”; title: She looked at the baby and answered, “We’ll change his name, so that people will not know that he’s Joshua David.; title: We’ll call him Alex.”; title: Mr. Baker smiled and said, “I never thought about this.  Yes, it’s a great idea!”; title: Chapter 2; title: THE VOICE FROM NOWHERE; title: Nearly six years had passed since Brother Noah and Sister Bianca had visited the Baker’s house. Nothing had changed since then.; title: Jack was now 6 years old.  He had his own room in the first floor, beside his parent’s room. He looked just like his father, but he was dirty like his mother. He was very fat. His parents let him eat as much as he wanted, and nothing was withheld from him.; title: He did not know how to dress properly.  In fact, he did not want to learn how to do it. His toys were all over the floor.; title: “Didn’t I tell you to put everything together after you’re done using them?” yelled Mrs. Baker at him one day.; title: “How many times do I have to tell you this?”; title: “Sorry, mum,” He cast a nasty look at her, and then started to clean his room.; title: Instead of cleaning it, however, he only made a big pile of toys, because he did not know how to clean it properly.  He would always ask for help, but he could not this time, because his mother was very angry with him. Despite all this laziness and dirtiness, however, his parents kept saying that he was the best child in the whole world.; title: There were pictures of Mr. Baker, his wife and their son almost in every room of the house.; title: However, there was one more person living in that house, yet they did not have pictures of him. He was very handsome. He had very beautiful hair and eyes. His room was upstairs.  It was the cleanest of all the rooms in the Baker’s house, because he cleaned it every day. However, he did not ask anyone to help.   There was no one to help him anyway.; title: He did not have any toys, because no one loved him or even cared for him.  Therefore, there was nobody to buy him things to play with. Life was very hard and boring for him.; title: He was the servant of the Bakers.  He was the most hated person in the house. His name was Joshua David, but the Bakers called him Alex.  They did not want anyone to know that he was the famous Joshua David, who had defeated the strongest wizard in the world, Beelzebub. When asked about this boy, the Bakers would always say, “We adopted him,” In this way, they were able to hide his true identity.; title: His room was almost empty.  It only contained his bed. Therefore, he had to put all of his stuff on the floor when he would go to sleep.; title: He helped the Bakers in everything that they asked him for. He never said “no,” no matter how hard the job would be. In fact, he cleaned the house better than Mrs. Baker did. He would even get up early in the morning to make them breakfast. Still, he was the most hated one.; title: “Wake up you! Called Mrs. Baker one morning.; title: She said this because he was little late that morning. “Get up and make us some breakfast! Don’t you understand that you’re late this morning?”; title: “Yes aunt,” replied Joshua. He was used to all this insulting.; title: He got up and put his shoes on. The date was March the fifteenth, 2206, which was Jack’s birthday. It was very cold that morning. Therefore, he was freezing when he went downstairs to make breakfast.; title: Before Joshua had come to live in this house, Mr. Baker would be the first person to wake up and make breakfast.  Now, however, it was Joshua’s job to do it. It was perhaps because he made better food than Mrs. Baker, or it was because he was their servant. Even their neighbors were surprised to see that their food tasted better now.; title: At the breakfast table, Joshua sat in front of Jack.  However, no one even cared if he was there or not.  At least he made them their breakfast. That was all they cared for. They did not even care if he ate or not. In fact, they never called him when the food was ready.  Therefore, he would have to listen to the sound of the dishes, and then he would know that it is time for eating.; title: “So what’s on the news today, William?” asked Mrs. Baker.; title: “Not much,” answered Mr. Baker. “They say that some of the Satanic Soldiers, or whatever they call them have been arrested.”; title: “Is that useful for our country?” asked Mrs. Baker.; title: “Not really,” answered Mr. Baker. “They don’t hate us.  They only hate that crazy country. So we’re safe even if they come to Canada, because they won’t hurt us.”; title: “What’s a Satanic Soldier?” Asked Joshua, appearing very interested. “And what’s the crazy country?”; title: “This is not your business!” yelled Mr. Baker. “And don’t ask any more questions!” Joshua had to deal with this every day. They never let him ask questions. Maybe they did not want him to find out the truth about himself.; title: “So what are they, dad?” asked Jack, who was eating a potato sandwich. He thought that his father would tell him anything.; title: Trying to change the subject, Mr. Baker said, “My beloved Jack!  I have something very interesting for your birthday tonight!”; title: “What is it, dad?” asked Jack, dropping his sandwich on the floor, because he was so happy.; title: “Maybe you’ll know what it is after you clean your mess,” said Mrs. Baker, pointing at his sandwich on the floor.; title: “Let him clean it!” he pointed at Joshua.; title: “You’re welcome!” said Joshua, as he was cleaning Jack’s mess.; title: “Don’t yell at my son like this!” Mrs. Baker got to her feet.; title: “You should be thankful that we took you after your parents died!  We could’ve left you with someone who would make you his slave!” Well he was their slave anyway. He was used to these words.  Therefore, without another word, he finished cleaning the breakfast table and then went upstairs to his room.; title: He sat on his bed and thought, “Is there anyone who sees all my sufferings? Does he even care about me? Will I ever leave this house?”; title: He thought about these questions, and then he cried. “Is there anyone who can hear my cry? Please come and help me! The whole world has turned against me! Why should I live any longer?”; title: He wanted to commit suicide. However, a voice in his brain said, “Don’t do it!”  He was very depressed. We can’t blame him, since he had to live with people who hated him.; title: “Get down, you!” he heard Mrs. Baker calling him.; title: So he wiped his tears and went downstairs. He saw Jack playing with his new computer.  That was one of the surprises that Mr. Baker was talking about during breakfast.; title: Next, he looked at the kitchen table, and saw a big package with a new piano inside it.; title: He pointed at the piano and said, “Is that for me?”; title: “Is it your birthday today?” asked Mrs. Baker, with a nasty look on her face.; title: “Not yet,” replied Joshua, laughing.; title: “Well then shut up!” yelled Mrs. Baker; title: Then she turned to him and said in a quiet voice, “Well if you work very hard with cleaning the house, we might let you play with it.  But only when Jack is not using it.”; title: “Never!” yelled Jack at his mother. “Whatever you buy for me is mine!  No one can take it away from me!”; title: She looked at Jack and just laughed. But Joshua understood what she meant by her laughter.  Of course, she meant that she was only joking. How would she ever let Joshua touch Jack’s toys? He was only a slave in the house, after all.; title: That night, which was Jack’s birthday, Mr. Baker’s parents were supposed to come and celebrate with the Bakers.; title: Before they arrived, Mr. Baker told Joshua, “My parents are coming to celebrate Jack’s birthday with us tonight. I want you to behave well. Be normal.”; title: “I always do,” answered Joshua.; title: “I know,” said Mr. Baker. “But I’m just warning you.”; title: Then Mr. Baker turned to his wife and told her, “Clean the house.  I’m sure that Alex will help you.”; title: He paused for a second and said, “Well, I better go and get them.  It’s almost 7. I shall return with them in thirty minutes.”; title: Then he left.; title: Meanwhile, Joshua was wondering about why Mr. Baker had told him to be normal. “Is there anything strange about me that I don’t know of?” he asked himself.; title: The Bakers never told him who he really was. Whenever he would ask them about his parents, they would answer, “We don’t know anything about your parents, except the fact that they died when you were only six months old. We heard about you, and so we decided to take you to live with us. See how nice we are?”; title: “Get up and go wash your faces!” yelled Mrs. Baker to both Jack and Joshua, who were still sitting at the kitchen table.; title: “They’ll be here in thirty minutes.  Didn’t you hear what your father said?”; title: “And you,” she pointed at Joshua,; title: “After you’re done washing your face, come and help me,” She’s very mean to Joshua. She never said the word “please” to him.; title: “Yes, aunt,” he answered and then left.; title: He thought about how the Bakers are treating him. Will the parents of Mr. Baker be any better? He doubted it.; title: Suddenly, they all jumped when they heard a knock on the door.; title: “You stay behind,” Mrs. Baker told Jack and Joshua.; title: After that, she ran and opened the door.; title: “Welcome!” She said to old Mr. and Mrs. Baker.; title: “We haven’t seen you since Jack’s last birthday.”; title: “Ya…” Mr. Baker the elder said.; title: “Well your mother-in-law has been very sick.  So we couldn’t go anywhere.”; title: Indeed, Mr. Baker’s mother looked pale and tired.; title: “Where is Jack?” asked Mr. Baker the elder.; title: “Jack!” yelled Mr. Baker.; title: “Come here!  “Grandpa and grandma are here! They have something for you!”; title: But instead of Jack coming, it was Joshua who had entered the room. Jack was very shy. That’s why he didn’t come when his father had called him.; title: “Is this Alex that you were telling me about?” asked Mr. Baker, the elder.; title: Joshua became very nervous at that moment.  Everybody was looking at him now.; title: “Yes he is,” answered Mr. Baker unpleasantly.; title: “Come here, son,” called Mr. Baker the elder.; title: This was a great disappointment to Mr. Baker, because he thought that his father would treat Joshua the same way that he and his family did.; title: Joshua was surprised to hear Mr. Baker’s father calling him “son.”; title: He went and sat down beside Mr. Baker the elder.; title: Then he looked at Joshua, but said nothing.  He just kept smiling at him.; title: After a little while, only Mr. Baker the elder and Joshua were left in the room sitting together.; title: “How are you, son?” asked Mr. Baker, the elder.; title: “I’m fine.  Thanks,” replied Joshua, who was still shocked to hear someone calling him “son.”; title: After that, Mr. Baker the elder spoke again. “So, your uncle has been telling me how much you help them. Are you paid for all your work? Don’t worry.  I won’t tell anyone.  Just tell me the truth.”; title: He asked this because he saw Joshua wearing Mr. Baker’s old clothes.; title: “Please…” cried Joshua. He was afraid that the Bakers might be listening to his conversation.; title: “I told you not to worry.  I won’t tell them what you say to me.  I promise. I usually keep my promises.”; title: “Well they mistreat me,” began Joshua quietly.  Then he told Mr. Baker the elder everything that the Bakers were doing to him.; title: “Wow,” Mr. Baker the elder was shocked to hear all these things that were done by his son.; title: “Well the school will start in September,” Mr. Baker the elder began. “So you won’t see them a lot. But I’ve been thinking if you could come to my house on weekends.  So you won’t see them even on the weekends. You can help me a little.  We’ll have fun together.”; title: Joshua smiled, “But what about Jack?  He might want to come too.  Wouldn’t he?”; title: “Yes,” replied Mr. Baker the elder, smiling too. “But we’ll let him stay with his grandma a lot, because he loves her and she loves him as well. I’ll speak to your uncle William, and he’ll bring you every weekend. You can also come during summertime. You could stay as much as you like.”; title: “Well I don’t mind helping people,” Joshua said. “But I don’t want them to mistreat me.”; title: “No one wants to be mistreated,” replied Mr. Baker the elder. “I certainly agree with you.  You will help me, but at the same time, we’ll have lots of fun together.”; title: They ate and drank a lot that night. Even Joshua ate a lot too. He was sitting with Mr. Baker, since they both had liked one another. There was nothing to stop Joshua from enjoying his meal.; title: Mr. Baker’s parents slept there, because it was too late for them to return to their house.  It was nine o’clock when they had finished eating their meal.; title: The next morning, when they were eating breakfast, Mr. Baker the elder put his coffee down on the table and said, “Well I’ve been thinking if you could bring Alex and Jack to our house every weekend,”  The Bakers were shocked to hear Alex’s name first.  But Mr. Baker the elder ignored them.; title: He pointed at Mr. Baker and continued, “You can do the same during summertime.  They can stay as much as they like. Jack can help his grandma, and Alex will help me.”; title: Mr. Baker looked up at his father. “Do you think that we can bring them to you tomorrow?  Well tomorrow is Saturday.”; title: “That’s a great idea!” replied Mr. Baker the elder, laughing. “I forgot that tomorrow is Saturday! Well I’m too old to remember, I guess. I don’t even know what day today is.”; title: So on Saturday morning, Mr. Baker took Joshua to buy him new clothes.; title: Joshua said in his heart, “O he doesn’t care about me.  He only wants his parents to know that he treats me well.”; title: So they bought new clothes and went back home.; title: When Mrs. Baker saw him, she spat on the floor and disappeared. She had never seen him wearing fine clothes.; title: “So you’ve got new clothes?” asked Jack, who was spilling his milk all over the table, because he was shaking from the weather.  It was freezing that morning.; title: “Yes!” said Joshua, smiling.; title: They went to Mr. Baker’s parents in their house.; title: “Welcome!” came the voice of Mr. Baker, the elder.; title: Joshua was with Mr. Baker the whole time, and Jack was with his grandma. Then suddenly he   realized that there was someone who loved him.  He thought that Mr. Baker, the elder, was a little crazy, but at least he wasn’t mean at all.  In fact, he loved Joshua more than he loved his grandson, Jack.  He found Joshua to be very helpful and smart boy.; title: When Mr. Baker came to take them back home, Mr. Baker the elder called him into the house.; title: “Can I have a quick word with you, William?”; title: “Yes, father,” answered Mr. Baker.; title: Mr. Baker pointed at Joshua and Jack and told them to get into the car.; title: “So William, I have found Alex to be very helpful and very smart. I believe now that he’s helping you a lot. But when we were at your house yesterday, we saw him wearing your old clothes. Why is that?”; title: Mr. Baker stared at his father.; title: “Have you been mistreating him?” asked Mr. Baker the elder. “Tell me the truth, William!”; title: “Yes, father,” He finally opened his mouth. But he was shaking.; title: “Did he tell you that?”; title: “The poor boy hasn’t told me anything,” Mr. Baker the elder lied. “But why have you been mistreating him though?  He’s very kind.”; title: “I have to go now, father,” said Mr. Baker, ignoring his father’s question.; title: He left without another word, leaving Mr. Baker, the elder staring behind.; title: The rest of March and April with the Bakers didn’t get any better.  But Joshua enjoyed going to visit Mr. Baker the elder every weekend.; title: May came and went, and nothing happened. June came and went and there were no good news for Joshua. July was just the same as the other months.  But because it was summertime, Joshua spent most of his time with Mr. Baker the elder, helping him.  He enjoyed this job a lot.; title: In August, however, Joshua had something to look forward to.  On August the twenty-ninth was his birthday. So in the late afternoon of August the twenty-eighth, Joshua went into the kitchen to see his uncle, who was drinking a big cup of coffee and watching the television.; title: Joshua banged on the table to get Mr. Baker’s attention.; title: “Yes?” asked Mr. Baker nastily.; title: Joshua smiled and said, “Well tomorrow is my birthday, you know.”; title: “Who cares about your birthday?” snapped Mr. Baker. “Now get out of here!”; title: He left the kitchen sadly. He went upstairs to his room.; title: On August the twenty-ninth, he expected them to do something for his birthday, but they didn’t. His birthday gift was just more work. He really hated being with them.  He wanted to get out of their house as soon as he could. However, there was no one to deliver him.; title: That night, Mr. Baker entered the house carrying two big bags and a big package. He put them in front of Joshua on the floor. So Joshua opened the big package, and there was a piano inside it.; title: “Who brought this?” he asked. But Mr. Baker ignored him. So he continued opening the bags.; title: When he had opened another bag, there was a little device in it. It had writing on it, which said, “Christian books, articles and other materials that would help you to understand the Bible better,” There was also a letter inside that box. On the top of the letter, there was an inscription that said, “Brother Noah,” But when Mr. Baker saw it, he ran to Joshua and snatched it from him. He also took away the device from him.; title: “It’s for me!” yelled Joshua.; title: “Be quiet!” Mr. Baker yelled back at him.; title: So then, Joshua opened the second box. It contained all kinds of sweets. There was a letter in that box. It read as follows:; title: Dear Alex,; title: I would like to wish you a happy birthday! I hope that you will like all the kinds of chocolate that I’ve sent you. The piano is also from me.; title: From your best friend,; title: Mr. Baker the elder; title: Joshua was surprised to find out that Mr. Baker the elder had remembered his birthday. So he was a little happier that night.; title: September the 8th was almost here. Now Joshua and Jack would be going to Hamilton Elementary school together.  Joshua didn’t like being with Jack’s friends, because they were taught to make fun of him. And they did it all the time.  Sometimes, they would come to visit Jack, and they would spend the whole time making fun of Joshua, because of his old clothes.; title: Jack’s parents bought him very expensive clothes. Joshua, however, had dirty looking clothes.  These clothes would’ve belonged to Jack if Joshua weren’t there. Actually, these clothes belonged to Mr. Baker when he went to Elementary school.; title: On the eve of September the 7th, Mrs. Baker was preparing Jack’s school stuff, but Joshua had to prepare his stuff on his own, because no one helped him. Yet he finished before Mrs. Baker.; title: Then she turned to Jack, who was standing beside her and said, “Be good, ok? Don’t let people say that he’s better than you!”; title: Joshua heard her.  Of course she was talking about him, because she knew how faithful and smart he was. She knew that his marks would be higher than Jack’s.; title: That night, when Joshua was asleep, a bright light appeared in the room. He heard something strange…; title: “My dear Alex?”; title: “Is there someone who loves me?” he thought.; title: “Yes, my child.”; title: “Is there someone who knows all my thoughts?” he asked, confused.; title: “Yes,” answered the voice. “I know all your thoughts, because I was the one who created you.  And I was the one who saved you from every evil.”; title: Joshua sat up.; title: “Who are you, sir?”; title: “I am the God of Abraham, Isaac and Jacob,” replied the voice.  “I am even the God of your parents.”; title: “I still don’t get it,”  replied Joshua, confused.; title: Then the voice continued, “I am the Lord your God who saved you.  You shall not have other gods before me.  I am the creator of all things.  I created the Heavens and the earth and everything in them. Then, I created human beings in my image. But they chose not to obey me.  Instead, they listened to Satan. He was one of my angels at first, but then he wanted to take my place as God.  Therefore, I cast him down. After I created humans, he decided to make them do the same thing that he did.  And they even listened to him.; title: He is the Lord of death.  Therefore, anyone who follows him shall die.; title: After human beings became his followers, death entered the world. After each one of his followers dies, he or she goes to hell, which is the place of burning forever.; title: But in the end, Satan himself shall be cast into that lake of fire too.”; title: Joshua looked all over the room, but he couldn’t see anyone, except the light. His mind was full of questions.; title: “So you hate all human beings now?” asked Joshua, not knowing which question to ask first.; title: “I don’t hate sinners,” the voice answered. “But I only hate sin.; title: After human beings had rebelled against me, I decided to send my only begotten son to the world to die, and take the sins of all the people.; title: He was the only one who was able to do it because:; title: 1. He was the only person who was sinless.; title: 2. Humans sinned against an eternal being.  Therefore, their punishment is endless.  But because my son was an eternal being, he was the only one who could take their eternal punishment.; title: To be saved, all you have to do is to open your heart to me.; title: And the Holy blood of my only begotten Son, Jesus Christ, will wash all your sins away.; title: Then as soon as you die, you shall be with me in Heaven.”; title: This message made Joshua very happy.; title: “How did Jesus die, sir?” he asked eagerly.; title: “Well he started preaching the truth about me, and then the people of his time didn’t like his message.  So they decided to crucify him on a cross.; title: He suffered a lot, just to forgive all your sins.; title: Even though they decided to kill him, yet it was my decision that he should die to save the whole world from their sins and everlasting hell.; title: But he came back to life after three days.”; title: So then, Joshua opened his heart to that God whom he didn’t know his name.; title: “What’s your name, sir?” he asked.; title: “My name is I Am, or Lord God All Mighty. You can even call me the Lord, Jesus Christ.; title: One day you’ll learn all about me. And you’ll also learn the truth about yourself as well.”; title: “When?” asked Joshua, but the voice had disappeared.  Even the light was gone.; title: So Joshua woke up on September the 8th to go to school, but he couldn’t stop thinking about the voice that he had heard last night.; title: What would people say if he told them what he had heard?  Would they think that he’s crazy?; title: Chapter 3; title: The Truth; title: Joshua David, who was known as Alex, was the first person to wake up on September the 8th.  He was very excited to go to school, because he would not be seeing Mr. and Mrs. Baker for six hours. Then after school, he would be spending some time doing his homework.  That would also let him stay away from the Bakers even more.; title: After putting his school clothes on, he went downstairs to make breakfast. He prepared four fried eggs, two cups of coffee and two cups of milk. The cups of coffee were for Mr. Baker and Mrs. Baker, and the cups of milk were for him and Jack.; title: “Good morning,” he said as Mr. Baker sat on the kitchen table, and started reading his newspaper as usual.; title: But Mr. Baker did not look at Joshua.; title: Then all three of the Bakers, plus Joshua, were sitting at the kitchen table, eating breakfast.; title: “Well Jack,” Mr. Baker spoke after five minutes of silence.; title: “I don’t want to hear anything bad from your teachers.  I want you to have the highest mark in the whole school. Do you understand?”; title: “Yes, dad,” answered Jack, shaking with fear.  He was not sure if he would be able to get the highest marks in the school.; title: So they got on the bus to go to school. Joshua tried to find the furthest seat from Jack.  He did not want to sit with Jack’s friends, who made fun of him all the time, because he was wearing Mr. Baker’s old clothes.; title: “Don’t sit with him!” Said a boy to a girl who was about to sit beside Joshua.; title: “Why not?” she asked sweetly.; title: “Look at his clothes!” said another boy, with a big smile on his face.  “They belonged to Mr. Baker when he was at school!” They all laughed.; title: “Don’t make fun of my father!” yelled Jack.; title: “Oh, sorry!” replied the boy.  “I mean, these clothes looked nice when your father wore them. But now they’re too old for anyone to wear.; title: The girl, however, pretended that she couldn’t hear him. So she sat beside Joshua anyway, and then looked at him.; title: “Um…” she didn’t know what to say. “What’s your name?”; title: “Alex,” he answered. “What’s your name?” he asked her.; title: “My name is Emily, and nice to meet you!”; title: They shook hands.; title: “Do you mind if I ask you a question?” she whispered.; title: “Well yes,” he answered nervously. “But only if you can keep it a secret.”; title: “Oh I will,” she replied.; title: Then she continued, “Why do all these boys hate you?”; title: “To be honest,” he replied,” I don’t know. But my aunt and her family hate me as well. So why should these guys treat me any better?”; title: “Wow!” She was shocked.; title: But then she smiled and said, “I don’t care if these boys like it or not, but I’ll stay with you as much as I can. And I don’t care about what your aunt will say.”; title: “That’s so sweet of you,” he smiled back at her.  “But these boys will treat you the same as me.”; title: “I don’t really care,” she replied happily.  “One true friend is better than a thousand false friends.”; title: “Oh, thanks,” he smiled.  “We can be best friends.”; title: Emily examined Joshua for a little while.; title: “Did you know that you’re very sweet?” she said in a soft and kind voice.; title: “Thanks!” he replied, finding her to be really caring, and interesting.; title: “You look exactly like Joshua David!” she whispered.; title: “Who’s that?” he asked, interested.; title: “Oh, well he survived when the most powerful magician in the world tried to kill him.”; title: “Who is that magician?” he asked, finding the subject very interesting.; title: She looked shocked, but then she said, “Well his name is Beelzebub.”; title: This reminded him of when he asked Mr. Baker about the Satanic Soldiers.; title: “What are the Satanic Soldiers then?” he enquired.; title: “Satanic Soldiers are his followers,” she told him.; title: Just then, the bus stopped near the Hamilton Elementary School.  Joshua entered the school happily.  He stayed with Emily as much as possible.; title: Joshua and Jack really enjoyed their first day at school.  They didn’t have any homework that day, because it was their first day, and they were still too young to do any homework.; title: But Joshua was still thinking about his dream.  He was also thinking about what Emily had told him about Beelzebub and his followers.  So these two subjects stayed in his mind all day long. He kept wondering why Mr. Baker didn’t want to tell him anything about the Satanic Soldiers.; title: On their way back home, Emily sat with him again.  Even though it was his first day meeting her, he fell in love with her quickly. It was perhaps because no one had ever been friendly towards him.; title: “O hi, Emily,” he said with a big smile on his face.  He almost wanted to kiss her, but he refrained because he felt that it wasn’t a proper thing to do.; title: “Hi, dear,” she replied.; title: The word “dear” really touched him.  Is she in love with him as well?; title: Then he thought that she was his only comforter.  At least now, he has someone to talk to. Even if she weren’t that pretty, he would still love her, because she was the only person who didn’t hate him. In fact, she didn’t care if people made fun of her being with him or not.; title: After he went home, he was still thinking about his dream.  Now he wanted to tell it to Mr. Baker, but he was a little afraid. What would Mr. Baker say about it?; title: Finally, he decided to share it with all of the Bakers.; title: After he had finished talking, Mr. Baker took his wife to their room, and shut the door behind them.; title: “So…” Mr. Baker began. “This Alex is very smart with making up stories.  I’m thinking that we could make him write stories and get them published, because then we’ll get all the money. What do you think, Allison?”; title: She looked at him with a big smile on her face and whispered, “I always thought that I was the only one who had good ideas, but this time it’s you! Yes, it’s a great idea! Go ahead and do it! It doesn’t hurt to try, you know.”; title: After they finished talking, they went back to the kitchen, where Joshua and Jack were waiting for them. They were wondering about why Mr. Baker had taken his wife to their bedroom.; title: “Alex!” said Mr. Baker, laughing.; title: “Come here!”; title: Joshua was afraid.  He thought that he was in trouble.  But when he looked into Mr. Baker’s face, he saw a big smile.  And for the first time, Mr. Baker didn’t seem angry.; title: “Sit down.” He pointed at a chair beside him.  This was Joshua’s first time sitting beside Mr. Baker.; title: Then Mr. Baker began, “I’ve read many great stories, but I’ve never heard a great one like yours.  Whether it’s true or not, I think that you should write it down. Then many people will read it and they’ll be impressed by your writings. We’ll help you write it down.  And it would be better if you would make up more stories, so that we could have a big book filled with your amazing writings.”; title: Mr. Baker, however, wasn’t thinking about the great writings of Joshua, but he was only thinking about the money that could result.; title: For the first time with the Bakers, Joshua suddenly felt a little happy.; title: Ok…” he said, with a happy look on his face.  “But you must treat me well before I begin writing.”; title: “I’ll buy you a computer tomorrow,” smiled Mr. Baker.; title: Joshua thought that he was dreaming.  A computer?  Did Mr. Baker say that he’ll buy him a computer?  That was impossible.  The next day, however, Mr. Baker entered the house with a computer.  It was an old computer, but Joshua was too happy to realize it.; title: So Joshua and his uncle started writing.  It took them six years to write 55 pages.  They decided to stop there. The book was called, “A collection of stories by Alex Baker and William Baker.” Joshua made up and wrote all the stories. Mr. Baker was the editor.; title: One day, Mr. Baker decided to go to school with Joshua and Jack to show the teacher this book. All the people at Hamilton Elementary school liked it. So the school decided to award Joshua $1000 for this great book.; title: Mr. Baker, however, took the money from Joshua and said, “You don’t need that.”; title: So Joshua, very angrily, handed the money to Mr. Baker.; title: It was then that Joshua understood why Mr. Baker wanted him to write these stories. He felt guilty of himself for writing this book.; title: Mr. Baker kept selling copies of this book, and he made thousands of Canadian dollars.; title: Since grade six was the last year at Hamilton Elementary School, Joshua and Emily kept talking about attending grade seven at another school.; title: “I might not be seeing you,” she said, sadly. “But you better meet my parents before we leave this school!” she continued. “I’ve been telling them all about you.  Actually, I keep talking about you all the time.”; title: “So when are they going to see me?” asked Joshua curiously.; title: “Tomorrow,” she replied, smiling. “They’ll come during lunch time.”; title: “Well I can’t wait to meet them,” he said cheerfully.; title: “Yes,” she replied. “Well they can’t wait to see you either.”; title: During lunchtime the next day, Mr. Bob, Emily’s father, had arrived at school.; title: He looked handsome.  He wasn’t mean like Mr. Baker. Joshua would love to sit with him for sure.; title: Mr. Bob was waiting for them in the cafeteria.; title: Suddenly, he saw Emily and a boy walking beside her.  They were coming toward him. He was sure that it was Joshua walking beside Emily. And he was right.; title: Next second, Emily and Joshua were standing in front of him.; title: “Oh hello, dad,” said Emily pleasantly. “This is Alex.”; title: Mr. Bob and Joshua shook hands.; title: “Nice to meet you,” said Mr. Bob, shaking with excitement.; title: “Nice to meet you too, sir,” replied Joshua, very happily.; title: Mr. Bob and Joshua sat together on one of the cafeteria tables. Emily sat beside Joshua.; title: “Well you’re coming with us today,” he told Joshua. “Because everyone in my family wants to see you.”; title: “But what about my aunt and uncle?” asked Joshua.; title: “I’ll give them a call, explaining where you’ll be,” replied Mr. Bob.; title: And certainly Mr. Bob called the Bakers, and told them the news.  He said, “My daughter, Emily Bob, is a friend of Alex.  And I’m taking him to my house for the rest of the day.” The Bakers agreed, and had no problem with the afternoon plans.; title: Joshua didn’t use the school bus that afternoon, because he went with Emily in Mr. Bob’s car.; title: When they had reached the house, they saw everyone in the Bob household standing at the door waiting to meet Joshua.; title: “Oh this is Alex!” shouted Mrs. Bob, who looked pretty like her daughter, Emily. Then she put her arms around him, and kissed him. Joshua had never been kissed before since he had come to live with the Bakers.; title: Joshua went inside with them.  The Bob’s house was the cleanest house that Joshua had ever seen.; title: Emily’s brother, Jeff, sat beside Joshua. He looked at Emily, who was angry because she wasn’t sitting with Joshua, and said, “Well you’ve sat and talked to him more than anyone of us.  So now it’s my turn to talk to him.” She then agreed.; title: That night, Joshua had a lot of fun with the Bobs.  He even enjoyed being with them more than being with Mr. Baker the elder, because he felt like he was with his own family. They treated him with honor and respect, although they did not know how special he was.   He hoped that he could stay with them forever, but he knew that the Bakers wouldn’t let him.; title: “What religion do you follow?” asked Jeff.; title: “What’s a religion?” he asked thoughtfully.  He had never heard the word “religion” before because the Bakers didn’t explain anything to him.  At times, he had a very poor knowledge about things.; title: “You don’t know what a religion is?” asked Jeff seriously.; title: “Well I’ve never heard this word before,” answered Joshua, amazed. “The Bakers haven’t taught me anything.”; title: “All right,” said Jeff, finding it strange that Joshua didn’t know anything about religion.; title: “Do you know who Jesus Christ is then? I’m sure you’ve heard of him.”; title: “Yes!” replied Joshua happily. Then he began to tell Jeff all about when the Lord had appeared to him.; title: Jeff was amazed. So he said, “Wow. That’s amazing!”; title: “And why’s that?” asked Joshua.; title: “Well we have the Bible,” answered Jeff. “The Bible contains everything that we need to know about God.  So why would he need to appear to us? He appeared to you because you’ve never read the Bible.  Therefore, you don’t know anything about him. Sometimes, however, the Blessed Virgin Mary and other saints do appear.”; title: Joshua wanted to ask about what the Bible was, but Jeff had answered the question.; title: “Can I give you a Bible?” asked Jeff excitedly.; title: “Ummm…” said Joshua, trying to imagine what the Bakers would say if they saw him reading the Bible. “I’m not sure if they’ll let me read it though.”; title: Jeff understood that he was talking about the Bakers.  He replied, “Well try it and see. You won’t get in trouble, because you could tell them that we gave it to you as a gift.”; title: “Sure!” replied Joshua, smiling.; title: “I’ll be back in two seconds,” said Jeff, getting to his feet.; title: Then he came back carrying a book in his hand.; title: “This is the Holy Bible,” he said, handing the book over to Joshua. “Look at it now before they can stop you.”; title: Then Jeff started explaining what the Bible was. “This big book is divided into smaller 66 books.  Each book contains chapters, and each chapter contains verses. The Bible was written over a period of 1600 years.  It was written by 40 different authors, who were all inspired by the Holy Spirit, the spirit of God. It contains law, history, poetic and prophetic books.”; title: Joshua found the Bible to be a very interesting book to read.  He wanted to read it to learn about God.; title: “So this book tells me everything that I need to know about God?” asked Joshua, flipping through the pages of the Bible.; title: “Certainly!” said Jeff happily.  “It even explains where we came from, and life after death.; title: Suddenly, dinner was ready.; title: “Come here!” shouted Mrs. Bob. “Dinner is served!”; title: Within a second, they were all in the big- beautiful kitchen.  It wasn’t the same dirty kitchen that Joshua was used to seeing at the Baker’s home.; title: There was something strange that Joshua had never seen in his whole life.; title: “Let’s pray before we eat,” said Mr. Bob.; title: “What do you mean by pray?” asked Joshua, astonished.; title: Mr. Bob was shocked when he heard Joshua’s question.; title: I’ll explain it,” said Jeff quickly, because he remembered what Joshua had told him about not knowing anything about religion.; title: “Praying is the act of communicating with God.  Before we eat, we thank God for the food that he has provided for us.”; title: Then they prayed: “O Lord all Mighty.  We thank you for all that you have done for us.  We thank you for your unconditional love for us.  You sent your only begotten son, the Lord Jesus Christ, to die for our sins. Lord, we ask you in the name of our Lord and Savior, Jesus Christ, to bless this food.  Lord please bless all of those who will eat from it. In Jesus’ name, we pray.”; title: In unison, they all said, “Amen.”; title: Then they sat back in their chairs.; title: There were all kinds of food, including french fries, stake, pasta and much more. Again, Emily was unable to sit beside Joshua, for Mr. Bob was sitting on his right and Jeff on his left. Joshua ate more than he had ever eaten in his whole life.; title: After dinner, they recited another prayer: “Dear Lord, We thank you for all that you’ve done for us.  We thank you for your grace.  Your loving-kindness is beyond all measures. Amen.”; title: So Joshua stayed with the Bob’s for another hour, and then he decided that it was time for him to leave, for it was already ten o’clock.; title: Emily ran after him crying, since she wouldn’t be seeing him until September, when school would commence again.  But she wasn’t even sure if she would be seeing him, for they didn’t know what schools they would be going to. So she kissed him.  Then he started crying as well.  They hugged each other for a minute, and then kissed goodbye again.; title: After he went back to the Bakers, they wanted him to tell them everything that he did with the Bobs.  So he told them everything.; title: Then they saw him carrying a book.; title: “What’s this?” asked Mr. Baker, snatching the book from him.; title: “This is very dangerous for you, boy.  You can’t have it in this house.”; title: After a little pause, Mr. Baker looked at Joshua.; title: “Ukh!” he said angrily.; title: “I don’t know if I would ever want to visit a family like this!”; title: Joshua knew that it was best for him not to argue. So he said, “Well I’m tired.  I need some sleep.” This was true, since he had spent the whole day having fun.; title: Then he went upstairs to his room.; title: It was their last day at Hamilton Elementary School.  He knew that he wouldn’t be seeing Emily for two months.  This made him very depressed.; title: In two months, he and Jack would be going to another school. He was very sad that the school was over, because he knew how boring his summer would be with the Bakers.; title: As for the Bible that Jeff had given to him, Mr. Baker hid it somewhere.; title: One day during that summer, Joshua had a strange dream.  He didn’t see anyone, but he heard someone saying, “Joshua David, the boy whom Beelzebub couldn’t kill. He was only six months when the most evil person in the whole world, Beelzebub, couldn’t kill him.  In fact, he lost all his magical powers when he tried to do it. No one knows where he is, but he’s not as powerful as before.”; title: And Joshua woke up.; title: He heard Mrs. Baker calling him to get up, and make breakfast.; title: The weather was very nice that day.  So Joshua didn’t need to put his coat on when he went downstairs to make breakfast.; title: After he finished cleaning the dishes after breakfast, Joshua was walking when he heard Mr. and Mrs. Baker talking in their room.  So he moved closer to the door and began listening.; title: “So what did the email say?” he heard Mrs. Baker asking her husband.; title: “Well they want to come and take him…”; title: The door was suddenly opened.; title: “What are you doing here, boy?” yelled Mr. Baker at Joshua.; title: “Nothing,” said Joshua, afraid.; title: “Then why were you standing at our door?” asked Mr. Baker, pushing him aside.; title: “I was just going to the washroom,” he lied. “And then you suddenly opened the door and started yelling at me.” Thankfully, his lie saved him from Mr. Baker’s wrath.; title: That evening, they heard a knock on the door. Joshua ran upstairs to his room.  But the rest of them stayed in the kitchen, except for Mr. Baker who went to get the door.; title: “Oh hello, Mr. Baker,” said a man that Mr. Baker recognized.; title: It was Brother Noah, who brought Joshua to the Bakers.  But there was another man with him.  That man looked older than Brother Noah.; title: “This is Pastor Moses, the Prophet at the Holy Community building.” He introduced Pastor Moses to Mr. Baker.; title: Then Mr. Baker went inside, but he didn’t shut the door behind him.  So they followed him.  Brother Noah and Pastor Moses sat beside each other overlooking the Television.; title: Brother Noah began, “We’ve come to take Joshua to prepare him for New Jerusalem.”; title: “He’s not going there!” yelled Mr. Baker. He said this because Joshua was their servant. Therefore, he did not want to lose him.; title: “Well you can’t stop him, sir,” smiled Brother Noah. “So where is he?”; title: Joshua was upstairs standing near the door of his room.  So he decided to go down to see what was going on.; title: “Oh hello Joshua,” said Brother Noah, getting to his feet.; title: “Excuse me,” said Joshua nervously. “My name is Alex.”; title: Brother Noah looked at the Bakers, shocked. “What have you done to him?” he asked loudly.; title: “I want to know!”; title: “Please leave the house at once!” shouted Mr. Baker.; title: “We can’t leave until we take Joshua.  And you can’t call the police, because we’ll tell them what you’re doing to the boy!”; title: This frightened the Bakers, but Joshua said, “They’re not doing anything to me.”; title: Then Brother Noah looked at him and shouted, “You are Joshua David!”; title: Joshua fell to the floor with a big shock. He couldn’t believe that he was the famous Joshua David. Nevertheless, it was then that Joshua understood why Emily had told him that he looked like Joshua David.; title: “Yes!” continued Brother Noah. “You’re Joshua David.  The most evil person in the whole world tried to kill you, but somehow, the Lord performed a miracle and saved you.  So instead, Beelzebub was punished and he lost all his magical powers.”; title: But then Joshua began to wonder. If he was the famous Joshua David, then why was he living with bad people? He should have been living in a palace.; title: “How do you know that, sir?” asked Joshua eagerly.; title: Brother Noah went over to him and helped him to stand up, and then explained, “Before your parents died, they were in my building, but somehow, Beelzebub was able to enter the building.  Then he murdered them, but when he tried to take your life, he fell down to the floor.  One of his servants knew that it was the Lord who did it.  Then they disappeared.  But he has lost all of his magical powers.”; title: Brother Noah smiled and said to Joshua, “I forgot to introduce myself. My name is Brother Noah. I’m the leader of the Holy Community building, where your parents lived.”; title: They shook hands.; title: “And this is Pastor Moses,” he pointed at the old man. “He’s our only prophet.”; title: “What’s your building, sir?” asked Joshua; title: “My building is where your parents lived.  It also contains the school that they went to. That’s why I’ve come to take you with me, because your parents lived in my building, I’m responsible for you.”; title: “Well I’ve never heard anything about my parents,” said Joshua truthfully.; title: Brother Noah looked at the Bakers and said, “Tell me, what’ve you done to him.”; title: Finally, Mr. Baker found his voice.; title: “We promised not to tell him anything about his parents.  We even changed his name from Joshua to Alex so that no one would ever know who he is.”; title: Chapter 4; title: The Best Birthday; title: Brother Noah was shocked to learn that Joshua knew nothing about himself, or his parents. He did not know what to say.; title: Then Joshua wanted to make the conversation a little interesting.  He asked Brother Noah, “Where is your building, sir?”; title: Brother Noah smiled and said, “Well, it’s not really my building, but I’m the leader of it. This building is not in Canada.  In fact, it is located in a country not part of any of the seven continents.”; title: “Then where is it, sir?” said Joshua, sounding amused. He knew that there were only seven continents.; title: Brother Noah got up and said, “Well I can’t talk a lot now, because we have to take you away from the Bakers.  Then you’ll know all about this country. You’ll even get to live in it.”; title: “But how can I trust you, sir?” asked Joshua.; title: “Hmmm…” replied Brother Noah. “I was the one who brought you to this house.  You’ll know all this later. Ask them if you don’t believe me.” He pointed at Mr. Baker and Mrs. Baker.; title: Okay then…” said Joshua excitedly. “I’ll come with you. But what do I need to take with me?”; title: Brother Noah went over to him and said, “Nothing, unless it’s very special to you.”; title: Joshua thought about this for a second.  What did the Bakers give him that was very special to him?  Of course, very little. But then he remembered something important.; title: He pointed at Mr. Baker and asked, “Can you give me the Bible that my friend gave to me?” He was talking about the Bible the Bobs had given him.; title: Brother Noah was reminded of something. So he asked, “Did you get the gift that I sent for your birthday six years ago?”; title: Before Joshua could answer, Mr. Baker said, “We sold it to someone, because we didn’t want him to read your nonsense.”; title: Finally, Mr. Baker gave the Bible to Joshua.  It looked just the same as when Jeff gave it to him.; title: “I’m ready,” said Joshua, feeling very fortunate and relieved.; title: Pastor Moses left the house first. Joshua thought that Pastor Moses couldn’t talk, because he did not say anything the whole time that he was there.; title: He asked Brother Noah, “Does Pastor Moses talk?”; title: “Yes,” replied Brother Noah, getting ready to leave. “But he doesn’t talk a lot, because he’s afraid that he might say something bad, you know.  He wants to be holy.  So he doesn’t talk unless he needs to.”; title: Mr. Baker got to his feet and pointed at Joshua and said, “You’re not coming back to this house again!  We don’t want to see you any longer!  Now leave at once!”; title: And without another word, they left the house.; title: “I’m used to this,” laughed Joshua.; title: So finally, Joshua was free from the Bakers.  He would be going to an unknown country very soon.; title: There was a car parked where they were standing.  Pastor Moses opened the doors for them, and they all got into the car.; title: Brother Noah sat in the driver’s seat.  Pastor Moses sat beside him.  Joshua sat beside Pastor Moses. There were no seats in this car, but there were three couches: one at the front, one in the middle and the third one was at the back of the car.; title: Then the car started flying, all on its own.; title: “How’s that possible?” asked Joshua, amazed.; title: This time, however, Pastor Moses was the one who answered him. “Well the Lord has blessed us with special equipment.  The Lord has also blessed us with skillful men and women. You’ll see some amazing things in our country.”; title: Joshua thought that he was dreaming, because he had never seen a flying car in his whole life with the Bakers.  But this time, not only was he seeing a flying car, but also he was actually in it.; title: “So where are we going?” he asked.; title: “To Ottawa,” answered Pastor Moses.; title: “Aren’t we going to your country?” asked Joshua, thinking that he was traveling to another country.; title: “Not yet,” smiled Pastor Moses. “First, we’ll take you to one of our families who live in Ottawa.  And on September the 7th, you’ll go with them to our world.”; title: Joshua realized that he was asking too many questions.  He had never been able to ask so many questions while living with the Bakers.; title: Pastor Moses, however, wasn’t angry with him asking many questions.; title: “So…” Joshua wondered aloud. “If your world is better than this one, then why are one of your families living here in this world?”; title: Pastor Moses smiled again. He explained, “Well, only believers in the Lord Jesus Christ can enter our country.  So not everyone can enter.; title: But many families come to visit their relatives who are not believers.  They come almost every summer. That’s why this family is here. Also, the father and the mother of the family that we’re taking you to, work at our embassy in Ottawa.  Their children, however, live in our world, because they don’t like living in this world.”; title: “So who’s this family that you’re taking me to?” asked Joshua, interested.; title: “Well, just as I said, they live in our building, and their children go to our school, but the father and the mother spend most of the time in Ottawa because they work at the Jerusalemite embassy.”; title: “You have your own school too?” asked Joshua, amazed.  He wondered how rich they were.; title: Pastor Moses looked at him and said, “Our building is huge.  It contains  thousands of sections.  It also contains a school, a church, a shopping place, a restaurant, a very big hall and other sections. Finally, it contains small sections, which belong to the families who live there.  Each of these sections are divided into few rooms and two bathrooms.”; title: “What about kitchens?” asked Joshua, finding it odd that he said nothing about kitchens.; title: So Pastor Moses continued answering his questions, “We don’t have kitchens, because all the people who live in this building eat in the restaurant. It’s a very big restaurant. You can go and eat in it whenever you like, not just during lunch or dinnertime.; title: Although this place is a ‘Community building’, it is not just an ordinary building.  It is called, “The Holy Community.”; title: Joshua found all these facts to be very interesting. He tried to remember them all.   Next, he asked, “Are there other communities that are similar to yours?”; title: “Countless!” replied Pastor Moses gladly. “In fact, most of the people who live in New Jerusalem are in these communities. So we don’t have a lot of houses.”; title: Finally, they reached Ottawa and the house that they were looking for.  There was a man waiting for them. He looked about thirty years of age.; title: “Welcome, sirs!” he shouted when they were leaving the car. Joshua was not revealed yet, since he was behind Brother Noah.; title: Then Brother Noah and this man shook hands.; title: “We have someone very interesting for you,” said Brother Noah, pointing at Joshua, who was now standing behind him.; title: “Well I always like meeting interesting people, you know,” Brother Abraham explained.  Then he looked at Joshua and shouted, “Joshua David!  What an honor!”; title: “This is Brother Abraham,” said Brother Noah to Joshua, introducing Brother Abraham to him.  They shook hands.; title: “Come in!” said Brother Abraham, leading Joshua toward the house. So Brother Noah and Pastor Moses followed them.; title: “Come here, everyone!” shouted Brother Abraham to his family.; title: Within a second, a woman had entered the room, followed by three boys and a girl.; title: “Welcome, to you both.” She pointed at Brother Noah and Pastor Moses.  Then they shook hands.; title: “Thank you very much, Sister Sarah,” they recited at the same time.; title: Then she looked at Joshua, who was sitting beside Brother Abraham.; title: “Is this Joshua David?” she asked nervously.; title: “Yes he is,” said Brother Noah excitedly. “And he’ll be staying with you until your children return to New Jerusalem.”; title: “Joshua will be staying with us?” she asked, shocked. “What an honor!”; title: Brother Noah looked at Brother Abraham and said, “Well we have to go now.  There’s still some work that has to be done.”; title: “Why don’t you eat dinner with us and then you can leave,” said Sister Sarah kindly.; title: “We can’t,” replied Pastor Moses. “But thank you very much.” Shortly after, they left.; title: Then Brother Abraham looked at Joshua and asked, “So how did you get here?”; title: Next, Joshua looked into Brother Abraham’s beautiful eyes and replied, “Well Brother Noah and Pastor Moses came to my aunt’s house, and then they took me and brought me here.”; title: “We’re very happy to have you with us!” said Sister Sarah, coming to him.  Then she kissed him and began to cry.; title: “You are the son of Joseph and Mary, who were our best friends!  You look just like them.  You remind me of them.  They were very kind to us.”  Then she left him and went to make dinner.; title: Then Samson, who was their oldest son, came and sat beside Joshua.; title: “Hi, Joshua,” he smiled.  “My name is Samson.” He thought that Joshua would laugh at his name, but Joshua didn’t laugh.; title: “Nice to meet you!” he said, shaking Samson’s hand with delight.; title: “Samson!” shouted Sister Sarah.  “Can you come and help me please?”; title: Joshua was left alone. He thought of how Sister Sarah was speaking to her son, and was reminded of how the Bakers spoke to him. They never used the word ‘please’ when speaking to Joshua.; title: After Samson had left, a very pretty and short girl came and sat beside him. He could tell just by looking at her that she was not born in Canada. However, he did not mind being with her, because the most important thing was that he was free from the Bakers.; title: “Hi,” said Joshua nervously.  “What’s your name?”; title: Then she smiled and said in a sweet voice, “My name is Emily.”  This name reminded him of his friend from school.  He almost wanted to cry, but he tried to sound happy.; title: So he said, “Nice to meet you.”  She held out her hand to him.  It felt very sweet and warm.; title: When he shook her hand, he felt a little sick. It was perhaps because he had fallen in love with her very quickly.; title: “So how old are you?” he asked, trying to keep the conversation going.; title: “Eleven, sir,” she replied sweetly.; title: So they started talking to each other without being nervous.  But John, who came and sat on the other side of Joshua, soon interrupted their conversation.; title: “Hi, Joshua,” he said, holding out his hand.  “My name is John.”; title: “Nice to meet you,” said Joshua, who had felt like he was at home.  He decided to love this family as if it was his own.  He felt very happy when each one of them would come to introduce him or herself.; title: John wanted to make Joshua his best friend.  So he asked, “What grade are you in?”; title: “What do you mean?” he asked. He didn’t understand what John meant because he thought that the Canadian school system was different from that of New Jerusalem.  “I should be in great seven now.”; title: “Oh I’m sorry,” said John nervously. “I mean, is this your first year at our school?”; title: “Yes,” replied Joshua.; title: “How old are you?” asked John.; title: “Almost twelve,” replied Joshua.; title: “Great! Me too!  So we’ll be in the same classes!”; title: “And what grade is that in your school system?” asked Joshua.; title: “It’s grade seven,” answered John. “We don’t have elementary school, high school and university or college. We start in grade one and end in grade sixteen. Now our grade one is grade one of elementary school in the secular world, and our grade sixteen is actually the fourth year of university or college.”; title: Joshua found the subject very interesting.  So he asked, “Do you live in that country even if you’re not going to school?”; title: “Of course,” replied John, sounding shocked. “It’s our country, you know.  And it’s your country as well, because your parents lived there, and you’re a believer too. We’re only here during summertime, because most of our relatives are not believers.  Therefore, they can’t go to New Jerusalem. So we have to come to see them every summer. Plus, my father and mother spend most of the time here, because they work at the Jerusalemite embassy.  As a result, we come to see them every summer. To be honest, I don’t really like coming here, because I love my country.”; title: “Well I don’t have any relatives to see,” laughed Joshua. “So I don’t think that I’ll have to come here every summer.”; title: “I’ll be back in two seconds,” said John, getting to his feet. And he disappeared.; title: “Hi Joshua!” said another person, who was coming to sit beside him.; title: He sat on Joshua’s right side and held out his hand.; title: “My name is Isaac,” he said.; title: “Nice to meet you,” said Joshua, shaking Isaac’s hand.; title: After they had finished eating their dinner, Sister Sarah said to Joshua, “You’ll be sleeping with John, if you don’t mind.”; title: “Of course I don’t mind,” said Joshua happily.  “I have decided to love you all as my own family.”; title: This touched Sister Sarah’s heart. So she went and put her arms around him and hugged him very tightly.; title: She cried, “Your parents’ kindness is still alive.  It remains in you.  They were very kind to us, and it seems that you are just like them.” Then she kissed him and left.; title: Joshua was very happy to be free at last.  He knew that this family would love him and treat him well.  In fact, it seemed that they loved him as one of their own children.; title: The thing that surprised him the most was that Sister Sarah kissed him a lot. As far as he could remember, he had never been kissed before, except by Emily Bob.; title: The date that Joshua left the Bakers was August the first, 2212.  So in twenty-nine days, it would be his twelfth birthday.  This would be the first best birthday that he had ever celebrated in his life.; title: On August the twenty-eighth, Brother Abraham said to everyone, “Today we’ll be going to buy your school stuff.”; title: “Why can’t we buy them when we get to New Jerusalem?” Joshua asked John when they were getting into Brother Abraham’s car.; title: “Because,” answered John, “We don’t have time to buy them.  We’ll be leaving on September the seventh, and the school starts on the eighth.  So we won’t have time to buy all these stuff.”; title: The country of New Jerusalem had an embassy in Ottawa, and beside that embassy, there was a big store that sold New Jerusalem material; title: That afternoon, they all went to the store.  There were other Jerusalemites living in Ottawa.  They too, were buying their stuff to be ready to travel back to their country.  They all lived in the Holy Community building, in New Jerusalem.; title: “Hello, Brother Israel!”  Said Brother Abraham to a man who looked older than he did.; title: “Oh hi, Brother Abraham!  How are you?”; title: “Oh more than happy!” replied Brother Abraham, shaking Brother Israel’s hand.; title: “Well it’s always great to be happy,” said Brother Israel.  “But what makes you so happy today?”; title: Brother Abraham pointed at Joshua and shouted, “This is Joshua David!”; title: Brother Israel almost fell to the floor, but his wife, Sister Leah, came and helped him.  When people heard the name “Joshua David,” they all became silent.; title: Next, Brother Israel went over to Joshua and shook his hand.; title: “You look exactly like your parents,” he said, smiling. “Yes, they were a very nice couple.  But too bad, they passed away. The good news is that they’re in Heaven now.”; title: Many people kept coming to shake Joshua’s hand.  So, because there were so many of them, he held both of his hands out.; title: “Now,” said Sister Sarah to Joshua, ”we need to buy you a controller.”; title: “What’s a controller?” he asked interestedly.; title: “A controller is like a cell phone,” replied Sister Sarah sweetly.  “But it has more buttons.  You can control and do many things with it.  You’ll know all about it when you get to New Jerusalem.”; title: After they had finished shopping, Brother Abraham asked his wife secretly, “Tomorrow is Joshua’s birthday.  So what should we buy for him?”; title: They thought about it for a second, and then Sister Sarah came up with an idea and said, “We’ll get him a spy.”; title: “That’s a great idea!” said Brother Abraham in relief. “He needs it for his enemies.”; title: So they bought him a spy, and hid it.  They planned to give him his present on his birthday, the following day.; title: “Now,” said Brother Abraham.  “What would you like to drink, everyone?”; title: Joshua said to John, who stayed beside him the whole time that they were in the store, “If I drink coffee, will it hurt me?”  He didn’t know whether coffee was good or bad for him, because the Bakers never let him drink coffee.; title: “Why should it hurt?” replied John.; title: So Joshua asked for a big cup of coffee.  He had never had coffee in his whole life.  Once he started drinking, he loved it.; title: “Wait a second,” said Joshua to Brother Abraham when they were getting into the car to go home. “Who’s paying for all these stuff?”; title: “No one,” replied Brother Abraham.  “In our country, everything is free.”; title: “But we’re not in New Jerusalem now,” whispered Joshua, so that only Brother Abraham could hear him.; title: “It doesn’t matter,” answered Brother Abraham happily. “The store belongs to the people of our country.  So everything is free.”; title: The next day, which was Joshua’s birthday, everyone was happy.  They were preparing to celebrate his twelfth birthday. Joshua had never celebrated his birthday in his whole life, because his parents were murdered when he was only six months old. The Bakers didn’t care about his birthday.; title: “Don’t work too hard,” said Joshua to Sister Sarah. “I don’t want it to be too big, you know.”; title: “Well we’re not working too hard, dear,” she assured him.; title: But that night, the kitchen table was decorated with all kinds of beautiful stuff including flowers and twelve candles, because he would be turning twelve years old that night.; title: When they were all seated at the kitchen table, Brother Abraham said, “Let’s read a few verses from the Bible.  We’ll be reading Psalm 150.”; title: Joshua took out the Bible the Bobs had given him when he visited them.  So He opened it to Psalm one hundred and fifty.; title: “Can I read it out loud please?” he asked excitedly.  He had never read the Bible aloud.; title: “Sure!” said Brother Abraham happily.; title: So they all stood up with their Bibles opened to Psalm one hundred and fifty.; title: Then Joshua began to read:; title: “Praise The Lord! Praise God in his sanctuary! Praise him in his heavens for his acts of power!; title: Praise him for his mighty acts! Praise him according to his excellent greatness!; title: Praise him with the sounding of the trumpet! Praise him with harp and lyre!; title: Praise him with tambourine and dancing! Praise him with stringed instruments and flute!; title: Praise him with loud cymbals! Praise him with resounding cymbals!; title: Let everything that has breath praise The Lord! Praise The Lord!”; title: Altogether, they all said, “Amen.”; title: Joshua was sitting with John.; title: “What does ‘Amen’ mean?” he asked.; title: John answered, “It means ‘certainly’ or ‘truly.’ Every prayer should end with this word.”; title: Then Brother Abraham returned  to the kitchen.  The whole place fell silent.  He was carrying a little box.  Suddenly, he put it in front of Joshua on the table.; title: “Happy birthday, Joshua!” said Brother Abraham. “This is for you!  Open it.”; title: Joshua opened it, and inside it, there was a device that had two microphones and two little cameras attached to it.; title: “What’s this, sir?” he asked, holding the box in his hands.; title: Brother Abraham looked at the box and explained, “This is a spy.  You can send it to anywhere and it will spy for you.  Then after it comes back to you, you’ll be able to listen and see what was happening in the area where the spy was. It can even fly.  That’s how you can send it to anywhere you want.”; title: Joshua was amazed.  So he asked, “And how do I bring it back to me?”; title: “Use your controller,” replied Brother Abraham.; title: Then Joshua pulled out his controller and said, “So is that what the controller is for?”; title: “Not just for this,” responded Brother Abraham. “But a controller can do countless things.”; title: Chapter 5; title: The two communities of the same building; title: Joshua had a lot of fun that night.  It was his twelfth birthday. The Abrahams made a lot of food that night.; title: Suddenly, someone knocked on the door. Brother Abraham ran to open it, and there stood three men.  They were Brother Noah, who was the leader of the Holy Community Building in New Jerusalem; Pastor Moses, who was the prophet of the Holy Community and Brother Israel, the man that Joshua saw when they were shopping at the New Jerusalem store.; title: “Welcome!” said Brother Abraham excitedly.  “Please join us, because we’re celebrating Joshua’s birthday!”; title: “Thank you very much, Brother Abraham,” said Brother Noah.  “May the peace and the grace of our Lord and Savior Jesus Christ be with you all!”; title: “Amen!” shouted the Abrahams plus Joshua.  “And with you too, sirs!”; title: “Yes,” said Brother Noah, sitting beside Samson.  “We’ve come to celebrate Joshua’s birthday with you tonight.”; title: Joshua started crying, because he had never felt all this love.  He had never seen so many people assembled only for his sake.  These people included the Abraham family, which was made up of six people, and the three men who had just entered.  In total, there were nine people celebrating his birthday with him that night.; title: Sister Sarah went and put her arms around him to comfort him. For a second, he thought that she was his mother. So he hugged her too, and started crying even more.; title: “I want to see my mom,” he said sadly.; title: “I know how you feel,” replied Sister Sarah, crying too. “But I’m your mother from now on.”; title: Brother Noah was carrying a very big box filled with bottles.; title: “This is for you, Joshua,” he said, putting the box in front of Joshua on the table.; title: “What’s this, sir?” he asked, as he was wiping out his tears. Then he started opening the box.; title: Brother Noah pointed at the box and said, “These bottles contain a type of juice that when a person drinks it, it kills all germs that are inside that person.  It fights every bad thing that is inside you or that makes you sick.  This juice also prevents sickness.  It is called the ‘prevention’ juice. Everybody must drink it before they can enter New Jerusalem. That’s why people live longer in New Jerusalem, because this juice prevents anything that makes a person sick. Also, if you don’t eat or drink anything for a whole day, just drink a bottle of this juice and you shall be fine. So it makes you healthier as well.”; title: “Is this magic or what?” asked Joshua excitedly.; title: “It’s not magic,” replied Brother Noah.  “But do you remember what Pastor Moses told you while we were coming here? The Lord has blessed us with skillful people.  So we’ve developed some amazing things that no other country has done so far. When you get to New Jerusalem, you’ll see countless  amazing things that no one in this world could ever dream of. That’s why the nickname for our country is ‘The New World,’ or ‘Heaven.’”; title: After Brother Noah was done explaining things to Joshua, Pastor Moses pulled out his gift and put it on top of Brother Noah’s gift in front of Joshua.  It looked like a USB.; title: “A USB?” asked Joshua, finding it to be a silly gift.; title: “It’s not a USB,” smiled Pastor Moses.  “As Christians, we believe that The Bible, which is the word of God, is a powerful tool that could be used against the devil.  So this thing is called a S.W, which stands for ‘Spiritual Weapon.  This S.W contains the whole Bible.; title: As Christians, we also believe in the power of Prayer and faith.  So this S.W also contains countless prayers for different circumstances.  You could use this S.W to fight the devil or do miracles, because it contains the whole Bible and countless Christian prayers and hymns.; title: To do a miracle, you need to take two steps:; title: First, have faith that the Lord is the ‘All Powerful’.; title: Second, point this tool at anything and say,; title: ‘In Jesus’s name…’ Then say what you want to happen. This tool is not a magical tool though.  It cannot do anything.  Only the words that are inside it and your faith in the Lord Jesus Christ can do miracles. Words without faith are nothing.”; title: “But why do we have to fight against the devil?” asked Joshua.; title: “The devil hates everyone,” replied Pastor Moses.  “But he hates the people of New Jerusalem more than any other nation, because we’re all believers in the Lord Jesus. Also, our country belonged to him, but then most of Jerusalemites opened their hearts to the Lord.; title: Another reason why  the devil hates us is because he  doesn’t like it that   God is  blessing  us a lot. So he’s always running after us like a roaring lion, and especially after you, Joshua!”; title: “But what’ve I done that upsets him?” asked Joshua, shocked and afraid.; title: Pastor Moses looked at him sadly and said, “Well, one of his followers tried to kill you but he couldn’t. Beelzebub got all his magical powers from the devil.  So when he lost his powers, the devil became very angry with you.”; title: Brother Noah looked at Pastor Moses and said, “I think that Joshua should take the ‘Basic beliefs and teachings of Christianity’ class, because he wasn’t brought up in a Christian house.  So he doesn’t know anything about the Lord Jesus Christ or the Christian life.”; title: Then he looked at Joshua and said, “Don’t be sad.  You’re not the only one who had Christian parents but wasn’t brought up in a Christian house.  You’ll meet people who have similar stories.”; title: Joshua felt better now that he knew that he wasn’t the only Christian who didn’t know anything about Christianity.; title: Brother Noah continued, “In fact, there are many Christians who are able to learn about their faith, but they choose not to learn. Also, taking this class doesn’t mean that you’re in grade 1.  Even older people have to take it too, because you can’t live in a Christian country and not knowing anything about Christianity.”; title: After the party was over, the three visitors left.; title: Then Brother Abraham said to Joshua, “I’m thinking of taking you to Hamilton to say goodbye to your friends.”; title: “Oh you don’t have to do that,” replied Joshua, very kindly.; title: “Well I don’t mind doing it.  So tomorrow after we finish breakfast, we’ll start traveling in my flying car.”; title: “Can we come too, dad?” asked Emily, who had never been to Hamilton before.; title: “Everyone is welcome to come,” replied Brother Abraham, smiling at her.; title: “Wonderful!” shouted John, who was sitting beside Joshua.; title: “Oh you can’t come!” said Brother Abraham, smiling at him.  “I’m just kidding, dear.”; title: After everyone had gone to sleep, Joshua and John went to their room too.; title: “Are you Canadians?” Joshua asked John when they were in bed.; title: “Well our grandfathers were,” replied John.  “But most of us were born in New Jerusalem. But we all speak English, because all of our grandfathers were either Canadians or Americans.”; title: The next morning, which was August the 30th, they were all excited to go to Hamilton, because they had never been to that city before.; title: Joshua, however, was normal, because he had spent more than eleven  miserable  years there with the bad Bakers.; title: So they got into the car and Brother Abraham drove about a mile and then stopped in front of a Tim Horton’s.; title: “What would you like to drink on the way?” he asked them.  “It will take us about an hour to get to Hamilton.  So you must have something to drink.”; title: They all said “coffee,” except for Emily who said,  “tea please.”; title: This was Joshua’s second time drinking coffee.  The first time was when they were at New Jerusalem store two days ago.; title: It would usually be John, who would sit with Joshua all the time, but this time, Emily was sitting on his right, and John was on his left.  John was looking at the window most of the time.  So Joshua and Emily were able to talk to each other.; title: “I can’t wait to return to New Jerusalem,” she whispered to him. “I don’t really like coming here.  I want to stay in my country the whole year.”; title: “Do all Jerusalemites visit their relatives during summer times?” he asked.; title: “Well most of them were born in New Jerusalem,” she answered.  “So they don’t have relatives in other countries to go visit.”; title: “Do people say ‘God bless you’ in the secular world?” asked John, who turned to Joshua.; title: “I don’t think so,” replied Joshua, who was still looking at Emily.; title: “Do they say ‘God curse you’ then?” laughed John.; title: “Ha-ha,” laughed Joshua and Emily with John. “I think that there’s more cursing and swearing than blessing.”; title: “So people swear in the secular world?” asked Emily, who couldn’t believe what she was hearing.; title: “Oh more than you can imagine!” laughed Joshua, remembering how many evil words the Bakers used.; title: “You see,” John continued.  “I lived my whole life in the Christian world.  So I don’t know how people speak in the secular world.”; title: “And neither do I!” laughed Emily.; title: “Oh you don’t need to know,” laughed Joshua.  “They swear a lot in the secular world.”; title: “Oh wow,” said Emily. “I guess that they’re like the people of Noah’s days, or the people of Sodom and Gomorra.”; title: “Who are these people?” asked Joshua.; title: “Oh they’re in the Bible,” replied Emily. “You’ll learn about them at school. Well, I’ll give you a summary of the story. The people of Sodom and Gomorra were very evil.  They did everything that the Lord hated.  So the Lord decided to send fire, which burned them alive in their cities.”; title: Finally, they reached downtown Hamilton.; title: “We’ll be visiting your aunt’s house first,” said Brother Abraham to Joshua.; title: “But they don’t want to see me,” Joshua answered nastily.; title: “I know,” replied Brother Abraham, who was now getting out of the car. “Brother Noah told me everything.  We’ll knock on the door, and if they don’t let us in, we’ll leave.”; title: “Okay,” replied Joshua skeptically. He was sure that the Bakers would not welcome him.; title: They knocked on the door.; title: “Hello, Mr. Baker,” said Brother Abraham as Mr. Baker opened the door.  He held out his hand to Mr. Baker, but he didn’t take it.  So Brother Abraham continued, “We’ve brought Joshua to say goodbye to you before he leaves for New Jerusalem.”; title: “And who are you?” asked Mr. Baker, viciously; title: “My name is Brother Abraham,” he replied.; title: “Now leave at once!” yelled Mr. Baker.  “Don’t ever come here again!  Do you understand?”; title: “Yes, sir,” replied Brother Abraham, who was going back to the car.; title: “Wow,” alleged Sister Sarah, as Brother Abraham got into the car.  “I’ve met many secular people, but I’ve never met people like these.”; title: “I know, Sarah.” Brother Abraham told her.  “Me either.”; title: “I hope that the next family will be kind to us,” said Brother Abraham as they were stopping at the Bob’s house.; title: “Oh they’re very nice,” Joshua assured him.  “They gave me my Bible.”; title: “So are they believers then?” inquired Emily, who was opening her window to look at the house.; title: “Yes they are,” Joshua told her.; title: They knocked on the door again.; title: “Hi,” said Mr. Bob as he opened the door.; title: “Hello, Mr. Bob.” Brother Abraham held out his hand.  “My name is Brother Abraham.”; title: “Nice to meet you,” said Mr. Bob.; title: Then he saw Joshua. “Alex!” he shouted.; title: “Can I tell you something?” asked Brother Abraham.; title: “Sure!” responded Mr. Bob happily.; title: Then Brother Abraham said, “In reality, he’s not Alex. His real name is not Alex.”; title: Mr. Bob was shocked.; title: “His real name is…” Brother Abraham continued. “Joshua David!”; title: Mr. Bob ran to Joshua and hugged him.; title: “So you’re Joshua David,” he said.  “But you never told me who you were!”; title: “Well I didn’t know,” said Joshua, who was almost crying.; title: Then Brother Abraham explained everything to Mr. Bob.; title: “Come in,” said Mr. Bob to all of them.  “And have something to drink.”; title: Brother Abraham was walking beside Mr. Bob, and the rest followed them.; title: “So are these all your children?” asked Mr. Bob.; title: “Yes,” answered Brother Abraham, thinking that Mr. Bob didn’t like having many children.; title: “Well may the Lord bless them all,” smiled Mr. Bob.; title: “So are you a Christian?” inquired Brother Abraham.; title: “Yes, we’re Catholics,” responded Mr. Bob.; title: “Well I’ve never met a Catholic person in my whole life,” said Brother Abraham.  “I’m very glad now that I’m talking to a Catholic person.”; title: “Where do you live then?” asked Mr. Bob, sounding amused.  “Catholics are everywhere, you know; and you’ve never met them?”; title: “Not in New Jerusalem though,” said Brother Abraham.; title: Just then, Mrs. Bob and Emily had entered the room.; title: When Joshua saw Emily, he almost wanted to cry.  She went over to him and hugged him very tightly.  Then she sat beside him.; title: “So what denomination do you belong to?” Mr. Bob asked Brother Abraham, after his wife had gone to prepare drinks for them.; title: “Evangelicalism,” replied Brother Abraham.; title: Joshua didn’t understand the words “Catholic” and “Evangelical.”; title: “So what are Catholics and Evangelicals?” he asked.; title: Brother Abraham looked at him and said, “They’re both divisions of Christianity.  Christianity is divided into many denominations, including Catholicism, Orthodoxy, Protestantism and Evangelicalism.”; title: “Exactly.” Mr. Bob agreed.; title: “I know that the Bakers didn’t teach him any of this stuff. So it’s their fault.”; title: “Well they weren’t Christians,” said Joshua.; title: “Well,” said Brother Abraham at last, getting to his feet.  “We better start going now.”; title: So Joshua and Emily Bob kissed each other and then he departed.; title: On September the fifth, two days before they had to leave to New Jerusalem, Brother Noah came to visit them.; title: “I’d like to have a little interview with Joshua, if you don’t mind,” he said to Brother Abraham.; title: “Oh sure,” replied Brother Abraham.; title: So Brother Noah took Joshua to an empty room, and they sat beside each other.; title: “Then he began to speak, “I just want to say few words to you before you get to New Jerusalem.; title: First, it is very important to know that we have few Devilist families living in our community, because they chose not to become Christians when most of our people chose to become Christians. Now a Devilist is another word for ‘magician’, because the magicians who live in our country worship the devil.  So we couldn’t force them out of our community or our country, because they were born there.  You’ll learn all this in History class. So there are two communities living in the same building, the Majority Christian Community and the tiny Devilist community.; title: Second, it is very important to know that we have liars in our community.  These liars belong to the Devilist community. Some of them say that they are Christians, but they’re not. Because their lies are so powerful, we can’t tell who’s a real Christian and who’s not. I command you to  be very careful. These Devilist people have their own sections in the school, so that we won’t be able to see them doing magic. You’ll probably see them in History and Geography classes.; title: And lastly, I want to warn you not to go to their sections, because they’re very dangerous for you.  There are demons and evil spirits living there.  All these demons and evil spirits belong to the devil.  So they hate Christians a lot, especially our people, and specifically you, because you defeated their master.”; title: He paused for a second and then asked, “Do you have any questions?”; title: “Yes, sir,” replied Joshua, who had found the talk to be very interesting but scary at the same time. “So no one can enter their sections?”; title: Brother Noah smiled and replied, “Only those who are strong spiritually.  I mean, only those who can resist evil spirits. But you will learn how to fight against evil spirits, because learning to fight against them is a very important thing in New Jerusalem, since they’re constantly at war with us. Jesus taught us how to fight against evil spirits.”; title: “Do you have any other questions before I go?” asked Brother Noah again, putting his traveling coat on.; title: “Do you have provinces and cities in New Jerusalem?” Asked Joshua, trying not to think about those demons and evil spirits.; title: “Yes we do,” smiled Brother Noah.  “We have countless provinces, and each province contains countless cities.  We live in the province of Heaven, and in the city of Heaven.”; title: Then he got up and said, “Well I have to go now, but I’ll see you at the Holy Community Building on September the 7th.”; title: “Thank you very much, sir,” said Joshua, getting to his feet too.  “Your information is  very helpful to me.”; title: “My pleasure, dear,” he said, and left.; title: But Joshua kept thinking about the demons and the evil spirits that Brother Noah had told him about. This was very frightening to him. What would he do if they attacked him?; title: After that, Joshua told John and Emily everything that Brother Noah had told him. They did not look surprised.; title: “We knew all this,” John spoke. “Because we’ve lived there since the day we were born.”; title: “They’re very powerful.” Continued Emily. “Satan gives them many unusual powers. But we have powers too, since our God is with us.”; title: Chapter 6; title: Traveling to the other World; title: It was the night of September the fifth.  Everyone was very excited to go back to New Jerusalem, because it was their country.  Even Joshua who had never been to New Jerusalem was overflowing with joy.  He knew that it was his country.  In fact, his parents were Jerusalemites.  However, after the death of his parents, he was sent to live with his aunt and Uncle Baker, who neglected him all the time.; title: So they slept that night and woke up on September the sixth. Joshua went to the kitchen for breakfast. Only John and Emily were there.; title: “Yes!” shouted Emily, who was sitting beside Joshua at the breakfast table that morning.  “One more night!  Tomorrow we’ll be going back to our country and to our world!”; title: John laughed at her and said in a sleepy voice, “How can you shout early in the morning?  I feel lazy even to drink water when I first get up.”; title: “Well I’m not lazy like you,” she laughed back at him.  “I’m able to drink water when I first get up.”; title: “You can’t drink water in the morning?” asked Joshua, who had found it crazy not to drink water before eating breakfast.; title: “Well…” smiled Emily.  “He’s just trying to tell you how lazy he is, you know.”; title: “Are you here, Mr. Lazy?” came the voice of Samson, who was coming toward them.; title: “Who’s Mr. Lazy?”; title: “Sorry, sir,” laughed John.  “It’s actually Miss lazy, you know.” He meant that Emily was Miss lazy, because he pointed at her when he said this.; title: That afternoon, when they were eating lunch, John said to his father, “Aren’t you going to do something for us before we leave for our world?”; title: Brother Abraham laughed and said, “You’re the one who should be doing something for us!  You’re going to the best country, you know.  And I and your mother have to stay here to take care of the Jerusalemite embassy.”; title: He said this because he was a Jerusalemite, but he worked for the Jerusalemite embassy in Canada.  He had to stay in Canada most of the time. And his wife stayed with him too.; title: Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah also preached in Canada, because they were both preachers. They would often speak about the Lord Jesus Christ to many people.; title: “But how are we going to get to New Jerusalem?” asked Joshua as he and John were left alone in the kitchen.; title: “In a flying building,” replied John.; title: “In a flying what?” asked Joshua, who couldn’t believe what he was hearing.  Was there such thing as flying buildings?; title: “In a flying building,” replied John again.  “We have big and very high buildings that can fly.  So each family or a couple can have a room in that building.”; title: “But how’s that possible?” wondered Joshua aloud.; title: John was cleaning the table.  So he put down his cleaning towel and said, “Well you’ll see some unbelievable things in our country.  Don’t you remember what Pastor Moses and Brother Noah said to you? Miracles are an ordinary thing in New Jerusalem.”; title: That night, everyone, including Joshua, was very happy and couldn’t wait to get into the flying building.  This would be their last sleep in this world for that year.; title: Joshua had never traveled to another country.  So he was little nervous.  He kept thinking about what would happen if he gets lost there.  Yet he was more excited than any of the Abrahams, because he was going to the country of his parents.; title: Another thing that Joshua was thinking of that night was the flying building. He was not sure whether or not John was telling him the truth. Were there really flying buildings?; title: So they spent almost three hours preparing their clothes and other things that they had to take with them to New Jerusalem.  Emily helped Joshua prepare his things, and when he was done, he helped her to prepare hers.; title: Their last dinner in Canada was ready by now.  Brother Abraham had gone to a restaurant to buy them their dinner, because Sister Sarah was busy helping her children to get organized for tomorrow.; title: During this dinner, however, Joshua didn’t sit with John or Emily, but he sat in between Brother Abraham and Samson.; title: “So are you excited to go to your country, Joshua?” asked Brother Abraham, taking a bite from his chicken sandwich.; title: “More than you could ever imagine, sir,” replied Joshua, smiling. “But I’m a little nervous though.”; title: “I agree,” smiled Samson.; title: That night, Joshua couldn’t sleep very well.  He kept thinking about the new country. He kept wondering how it feels to travel to another homeland.  Would he be welcomed there?; title: He dreamed that he was sitting with three people in a very big restaurant. Two of these people looked important. The third person was Brother Noah. But Joshua did not recognize the other two. One of them looked handsome, but the other one looked very ugly.; title: Suddenly, the ugly man fell to the floor. And Joshua woke up.; title: “Good morning,” said Joshua, as he entered the kitchen the next day.; title: “Great morning!” shouted Emily.; title: “You know what?” said John, laughing at her as he sat at the kitchen table.  “I’m just finding the truth about you.”; title: “What do you mean?” she asked sweetly.; title: “Well…” he took a drink from his coffee.  “I always thought that you were quiet and shy, but it seems that you’re not! Actually, you’re the craziest person in the whole family!”; title: “Only pretty girls are shy,” came the voice of Isaac.; title: “Well good morning,” he said, taking a seat beside Joshua.; title: “Well thank you, sir,” added Samson as he entered the room.  “It’s a great morning for me because I’m mourning for someone.”; title: “Who?” asked Joshua urgently.; title: “No one,” replied Samson.  “And he doesn’t live anywhere.  In fact, he doesn’t exist at all.”; title: John and Emily were used to these jokes.  So they weren’t sad or anything.; title: But Emily was still angry with Isaac, because he had said that only pretty girls were shy. So she said to him, “You said that only pretty girls are shy. Do you mean that I’m not pretty?”; title: “Brothers usually don’t think that their sisters are pretty, you know,” he laughed. “That’s how it works in New Jerusalem.”; title: “Well not all Jerusalemite boys think like you.” John reminded him.; title: Meanwhile, Joshua was still thinking about the dream that he had. Finally, he decided to tell it to all those who were sitting at the breakfast table.; title: “Hmmm…” wondered Isaac. “I don’t know what to say, brother. But Jerusalemite people get a lot of strange dreams. So you’re not the only one, you know.”; title: “Where is the flying building?” Joshua asked Isaac, trying to change the subject.; title: “It stays near the Jerusalemite embassy,” he responded.  “So we’ll have to go to the embassy and it will be there for us.”; title: As soon as they had finished breakfast, they started putting all of their stuff in their Jerusalemite Bags.; title: “Now carry all your bags and follow me,” said Brother Abraham, leading them toward his car.; title: “But you and mum should help us,” said Emily, trying to keep up with them.  “Because you’re not carrying anything.”; title: “Well I’m carrying my keys,” said Brother Abraham.  Everyone laughed.; title: “Want help?” said Samson, making fun of his father for this joke.; title: “And mum is carrying her arms,” added Isaac.; title: So they put all of their bags in the trunk, and then got into the car.; title: “Beside me please…” said Emily quietly as Joshua got into the car.  So he went and sat beside her.  He felt like that there was something in her heart that she didn’t want to tell it to him.; title: Joshua was happy that no one was sitting beside him except Emily, because he wanted to talk to her.; title: “Emily?” he smiled at her.; title: She smiled back but said nothing.  She looked like she was suffering from the inside.  She seemed to be broken hearted. Then she started crying.; title: “Do you love me?” he whispered to her.; title: “Yes I do,” she whispered back.  “I loved you from the moment I met you.”; title: So he hugged her tightly and said, “I love you too.” It was true.  From the moment that he heard that her name was Emily; he fell in love with her.; title: He continued, “When I went to school back in Hamilton, there was a girl who was the only person who loved me in the whole school.  Her name was Emily too.  I think that you saw her when we went to visit the Bob’s family in Hamilton.  Do you remember?”; title: “Yes, dear,” she replied, wiping her tears.; title: So he kissed her for the first time and said, “I’ll never leave you alone.”; title: “O you’re so sweet,” she replied.  “There was never a boy who loved me like you. I’ve been looking for someone like you for years.; title: Just then, they stopped near the Jerusalemite embassy.; title: Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah helped them carry their bags this time.; title: “The bags will have to go separately,” said Brother Abraham, who was carrying Samson’s bag.; title: As they entered the embassy, they saw many Jerusalemites waiting there.; title: “Joshua!” shouted Brother Israel from behind.  He was the man that Joshua met while shopping at the New Jerusalem Store.; title: “Now what should I do next?” asked Joshua, who had just given his bag to the man who carried it to the other Flying building to go separately.; title: “We just have to wait until they call us,” answered John, who was free from his bag as well.  “Then we’ll get into the building.”; title: “Do you mind if I sit with Emily?” asked Joshua nervously.; title: “Not at all,” replied John, who understood that they were in love.  “And I can sit with my girlfriend as well.”; title: “So how long does it take to get to New Jerusalem?” asked Joshua, trying to change the subject.; title: John moved closer to him and replied, “Well if you were to use things made in the secular world, such as airplanes and other things, it would take you forever to get there.  But if you use our flying buildings, flying cars or other flying things, it would take you only few hours.”; title: “That’s really far!” said Joshua, sounding shocked at the news.; title: “Well that’s why people consider New Jerusalem another world,” laughed John.; title: Finally, Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah came to take them to the flying building. There were many people getting into the building.; title: “You have to choose where you want to sit from now,” said Brother Abraham.; title: “Can I sit with Joshua please?” said Emily, who made Joshua feel happy but nervous at the same time.; title: “Do you mind if Emily sits with you, Joshua?” asked Brother Abraham, who also had understood that they were in love.; title: “Not at all, sir,” replied Joshua nervously.; title: “Well bye then,” said John, shaking Joshua’s hand.  “I’ll come to visit you in the building with my girlfriend. So leave some seats for us.”; title: “Bye,” answered Joshua nervously, who was left now standing with Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah and Emily.; title: Then Sister Sarah gave him a big hug and said, “Joshua, you are the Leader of the Holy Community.  I wish you the best. Don’t be afraid of anything.  Let the Lord be in the center of everything. Amen?”; title: “Amen,” replied Joshua, who didn’t understand what she meant by, “You are the leader of the Holy Community.”  She then left.; title: So Brother Abraham kissed Joshua and said, “Joshua, I love you as one of my children. I know that you have many enemies in the Holy Community Building, but don’t be afraid of anything.  The Lord will protect you.” Then he kissed his daughter and left too.; title: Joshua kept wondering about the phrase ‘You are the leader of the Holy Community Building.’ Why did they say that? Were they hiding something from him?; title: Now they were standing at the door of the flying building.  It looked exactly like a big apartment.  It was very big and high.  There were many rooms in it.  A family occupied each room.  There were Bible verses on almost every wall.; title: “Let’s get in,” said Emily, pointing at the door.; title: So he held onto her arm and she led him to the building.  They looked like a married couple.; title: When they had entered the building, everyone started looking at them.  Almost the whole building fell silent.  But Joshua and Emily ignored them.  So they kept walking until they found an empty room.; title: It was very small.  There was a couch, and a table in front.  So when they sat down, the table was in front of them.  There was also a window behind them, and a wall on Joshua’s right.  The door was on Emily’s left side.; title: There was a Bible verse on the wall, which was taken from Psalm 27:1.  It said, “The Lord is my light and my salvation. Whom shall I fear? The Lord is the strength of my life. Of whom shall I be afraid?”; title: Then they realized that John and a girl were in the room beside them.; title: “Is that his girlfriend?” Joshua asked Emily.; title: “Yes she is,” replied Emily, hugging him very tightly.  “Her name is Samantha.  I always felt jealous of John, because he had a girlfriend, but I didn’t have a boyfriend.”; title: “But now you have,” smiled Joshua.; title: “Of course I do,” she smiled back.  “So my jealousy is over, I guess.”; title: This was Joshua’s favourite day for many reasons including, he was going to the greatest country in the world and he had a girlfriend.  There was nothing to complain about.  He thought that he was dreaming.  He couldn’t believe that he was in a flying building; he couldn’t believe that he was going to the land of his parents, and he couldn’t believe that he was sitting beside a very pretty and sweet girl who loved him as much as he loved her.  He had never been that happy before.; title: “Ladies and gentlemen,” said a man in a microphone.”  “The building will start flying in two minutes.  So please find a seat anywhere and sit before the  crash.  Then after a few minutes of flying, you’ll be able to walk in the building again.”; title: “A crash?” asked Joshua frightfully.; title: “Oh, he’s only joking,” replied Emily.  “He does that all the time, you know.”; title: “So it’s one in the afternoon now,” said Joshua.  “So when are we going to be there?”; title: Emily looked at the door.  There was writing on it.  It said, “Holy Community flying building,  number 2,  will arrive at the Holy Community at four  o’clock.”; title: “So we’ll be there at four,” she answered.; title: There was a knock on the door of their room.  So they both got up and went to open it.; title: “Want anything to eat or drink, sir and Miss?” said a young woman, who was holding something that looked like a controller.; title: “Yes, please,” answered Joshua.  “A big cup of coffee and some cookies please.”; title: Emily asked for a cup of tea and cookies.  As they were telling her what they wanted, that woman was pressing buttons on her little device.  So then, Joshua realized what it was.  It was something to write things in it so that you would not forget them.; title: But he wasn’t sure whether he was right or not.  So he asked Emily, “What was that device that she was holding?”; title: “It’s a writer,” answered Emily, smiling.  “In New Jerusalem, we don’t use papers to write on, but we have this device.  We take it everywhere we go.  We just keep it in our pockets. We use the same thing in class. Also, we can copy stuff from any computer or device to it.  In fact, the only thing that we take to class is this device, because it has all our books, homework and notes on it, and we also type all our answers on it.  Then we send them to the teacher, because this machine is also connected to the Internet.”; title: Joshua found this machine to be a great tool for school, because he wouldn’t have to take anything with him to the class.; title: The woman brought them what they had asked for.  So now, they were eating together.  Joshua loved his coffee.  In fact, he ordered the biggest cup possible.  The Bakers had never let him drink coffee.  So now that he was free from them, he drank coffee almost everywhere he went.; title: “These cookies taste wonderful!” Joshua shouted. “Are they Jerusalemite cookies?”; title: “Yep,” replied Emily happily.; title: “They taste heavenly!” cried Joshua.; title: There was another knock on their door.  This time, however, it was John and a pretty girl, whom Joshua recognized to be Samantha, because Emily had told him about her.; title: “Hi,” said John as he entered the room, followed by Samantha.; title: “Do you know who this is, Samantha?” He pointed at Joshua for her.; title: She looked at Joshua for a second and said, “Joshua David?”; title: Joshua became very nervous.  He was wondering how people knew that it was him.  How did they know that it was him if they had never seen him?; title: “Yes he is!” said John excitedly.  So then he introduced Samantha to Joshua and said, “Joshua, this is my friend Samantha.”; title: Joshua and Samantha shook hands.  But he didn’t think that she was as pretty as Emily.; title: “So what’s new?” said John, taking a seat beside Samantha.; title: Joshua laughed and said, “Well I learned something new today.”; title: “And what’s that?” asked John, who was sitting in front of him.; title: Joshua laughed again and replied, “Well I learned about the writing machine.”; title: “Oh I have one,” replied John.  Then he pulled out of his pocket a similar device and handed over to Joshua.  “Everyone has one of those.” Continued John.  “Because we don’t use paper in New Jerusalem.”; title: “Never?” asked Joshua, shocked.; title: “Never,” replied John happily.  “Using this machine is much easier than carrying a hundred books in your backpack. We also want to save the trees. We feel sorry for them and we don’t want to cut them down or anything.  So why should we use papers?”; title: “I see…” replied Joshua, handing back the machine to John.  “So will I be able to get one when we get there?”; title: John looked shocked at the question.  So he asked, “Didn’t dad get you one when we were at the New Jerusalem Store?”; title: “Well I haven’t checked all my stuff yet.  But I’ll do when I get there, because my bag is not with me right now, you know.”; title: John looked at all of them and said, “As you know, The Holy Community contains sections for groups of friends to own.  So I’m thinking if we could get one that will have three rooms: one for me and \Joshua, one for Emily and Samantha, and the third one will be for Samson and Isaac.”; title: He paused for a second and then said, “Oh I forgot to explain something to Joshua. In every community building in New Jerusalem, there are two types of sections: one is ‘Family Sections’ and the other type is called ‘Friendsections.’ People who want to sleep with their parents sleep in the Family Sections. But if you want to sleep with your friends instead, you must sleep in a Friendsection. Since our parents are not with us at the Holy Community, we can get a section for ourselves, because friends can sleep together. In fact, most students don’t sleep with their parents, but with their friends. Sixty percent of the students sleep with their friends. What do you think, everyone?”; title: “I think that it’s a great idea,” replied Joshua, who felt happy to sleep with John because they were best friends.  He knew that he couldn’t sleep with Emily, as they were not married yet.; title: Even Emily and Samantha liked this idea.; title: “So we just have Samson and Isaac to ask now,” said Emily.; title: Chapter 7; title: The Holy Community Building; title: “Behold, I am making all things new.” [Rev. 21:5]; title: It was three o’clock in the afternoon now.  That meant that they had only an hour left and then they would be at the Holy Community Building.; title: Meanwhile, Samantha had fallen asleep beside John.; title: “She’s tired, I guess,” he whispered.  “She helps her parents a lot.  That’s why she’s tired.”; title: Then Joshua, John, and Emily decided to leave their room for few minutes.  As they got out of the room, everybody’s eyes fell on Joshua.  He tried to ignore them, but it was very hard, since they were looking at him from every side.; title: Then, a boy who seemed to be the same age as Joshua ran toward them.; title: “Hi Joshua!” he said, shaking hands with Joshua. “My name is Samuel Adam.  I’ll be going to grade seven this year.”; title: “Me too!” said Joshua excitedly. “So does all your family live in the Holy Community?”; title: “Just me and my mother,” replied the boy sadly.; title: Then, someone had called the boy.  So he left them.; title: “Se how famous you are?” smiled John.; title: Joshua smiled back at him, but said nothing.; title: “What does he mean that only he and his mother live in the Holy Community?” Asked Joshua.; title: “I don’t know,” replied John.; title: “But he looked sad when he said this,” said Joshua, who felt sorry for him.; title: “I know,” replied John.  “Well maybe his father is dead? Who knows?”; title: “John?” whispered Emily happily.  “Let’s forget about Samantha.  We’ll leave the flying building and we won’t wake her up.”; title: “It’s not funny!” He looked a little angry now.; title: “Well she’s not that pretty anyway,” smiled Emily.; title: Then John looked at her and said in a nasty voice, “You’re saying this because you’re jealous that you don’t have a boyfriend. Right?”; title: “Who said I don’t have one?” asked Emily, smiling at Joshua, which made him feel very nervous at that moment.; title: “Well who is he?” asked John. He knew that she meant Joshua, but he wanted her to say it.; title: “He’s standing beside you,” replied Emily, hiding her face away from Joshua.; title: “I knew it!” Said John with a victorious voice.; title: Then he shook Joshua’s hand and said, “Congratulations, brother!”; title: Next, he looked at Emily and asked, “So why are you still jealous of me?”; title: She did not answer.; title: Meanwhile, Joshua was looking at the people who were in the flying building. He saw many children sitting with their parents. This made him want to cry, because he did not have his parents to sit with. He enjoyed being with John and Emily, but there is nothing better than having your own parents.; title: “What’s the matter, brother?” asked John frightfully. He thought that there was something bothering Joshua.; title: “I wish that I could be with my parents.” Replied Joshua sorrowfully.; title: This forced Emily to hug him very tight. She told him, “Don’t worry, dear. I love you.”; title: She was touched with his sadness. So she started crying as well.; title: “I love you too,” said Joshua as he kissed her.; title: John, however, was not looking at them, for he did not want to embarrass them. He was very kind in that way.; title: The man who had the microphone spoke again and said, “Ladies and gentlemen, you have reached your destination.” And the building stopped moving.; title: So John ran to wake up Samantha.  Emily just kept smiling at Joshua, who was feeling nervous.; title: John and Samantha came and joined the other two.  So they started walking out of the flying building.  The place where they were walking looked like a very big garage. There was no garage in Canada that was bigger than this one.; title: “This is like an airport,” said John to Joshua.  “This is where the flying buildings stay.”; title: Finally, they reached a door.  But before they had knocked, the door slid open, and there stood Brother Israel with a big smile on his face.  He was holding a controller.; title: “Welcome to the Holy Community building, everyone!” He said to them.  “And welcome to New Jerusalem, Joshua!”; title: They followed him all the way, until they reached a small, but nice looking room.  So he stopped and said, “This is my office.  I need to talk to you to make sure where you’ll be sleeping, because sleeping is the most important thing here in New Jerusalem. You could sleep as much as you want. No one can tell you when to get up.”; title: Everyone laughed, and they followed him into the office.; title: “So I can sleep as much as I want?” Laughed Joshua.; title: “Oh, he’s just kitting,” smiled Emily.; title: “Sir,” said John. ”Can you call Samson and Isaac to come here please? We all want to sleep in the same section.  So a section with three rooms would be great.”; title: “Okay,” replied Brother Israel, writing the information down.  “I’ll call them right now.”; title: Samson and Isaac came into the room.  Then John told them about his plan to find a section for all of them.  They liked this idea.  So Brother Israel started checking his computer, looking for a three-room section.; title: At last, he said, “Now, follow me, everyone!”; title: They entered into a small hallway, and there stood six doors.  So Brother Israel opened the first door and they went in.; title: There were ten chairs and a table.  There were also ten computers. So each person sat on a chair, and then Brother Israel began explaining to them, “Your section number is 1994.  Don’t forget to record this number in your controllers when you get them. The first room in this hallway is the room where all of you can meet together.  So you could almost call it the capital of your section. Doors 2 to four are sleeping rooms, and the other two doors are the two washrooms, one for boys and the other one for girls.”; title: After that, they left their section and went to get their bags.  So each one of them got his or her bag and they all returned to their section.; title: John started teaching Joshua how to use his controller. Joshua was trying to remember all the information.; title: “You can do many things with it,” said John. “For example, you could open doors, or point it at other machines and press one of the buttons. Each button does something. But each button does something different on each machine.”; title: And then, there was a knock on their door.  So John and Joshua ran to open it.  It was Brother Israel, again.; title: “Can you come with me, Joshua?” he said.; title: Joshua felt very nervous, but he said, “Yes, sir.”  So Brother Israel and Joshua left section 1994.; title: “You don’t have to call me ‘sir,’ you know,” Brother Israel said. “Just call me ‘Brother Israel.’ I know that you’re trying to respect me, but in Christianity, all believers are brothers and sisters in Christ. It doesn’t matter how old you are. You get the same respect as anyone else.”; title: And then, they stopped near two doors, which had writings on them.  The writing on the right door said, “Brother Noah’s office.” And the door on the left said, “Sister Bianca’s office.”; title: “See?” laughed Brother Israel. “Didn’t I tell you that we’re all brothers and sisters? Brother Noah is the leader of this building, but we don’t call him ‘mister,’ you know.”; title: Then he knocked on Sister Bianca’s door.; title: “Come in!” they heard a voice from inside the door.  So they entered the room.; title: “Joshua!” cried Sister Bianca, getting to her feet and running to hug and kiss Joshua.; title: “Do you need anything, Sister Bianca?” asked Brother Israel.; title: “No thanks,” replied Sister Bianca. Then he left the room, leaving Joshua with Sister Bianca.; title: She held his arm and led him to a chair beside hers.; title: “So do you know who I am?” she began, sitting beside him.; title: “No, Miss,” replied Joshua nervously.; title: “Just call me Sister Bianca,” she said sweetly. So Brother Israel was right when he said that all Christians in this building are brothers and sisters.; title: She continued, “I was your mother’s best friend.  My husband was your father’s best friend.  We all took the same classes, and we even got married on the same day.; title: Then…” she started crying.; title: “Your parents were murdered.  I asked Brother Noah if I could take you and treat you like my son, but he didn’t let me do it.  So we took you to your aunt’s house.”; title: Then she started wiping out her tears.; title: Joshua asked, “So can I meet your husband?”; title: She started crying again.; title: “My husband is in the hands of the Satanic Soldiers.  They kidnapped him after the death of your parents.  Some of the magicians who live here say that he had killed many people, but that wasn’t true.  The Satanic Soldiers say that we must send them someone to kill, and they’ll free him. They believe that the blood of Christians is very sweet.; title: So many good and faithful brothers said that they were willing to die and save him.  But the Satanic Soldiers don’t want to tell us where to send these people.”; title: Next, Joshua looked at her and said, “Well, if he had done anything wrong, the police should’ve arrested him not the Satanic Soldiers.  They’re not in the police, are they?”; title: “No they’re not,” replied Sister Bianca sadly.  “But you’re right.  If he had done anything wrong, it would’ve been the police’s job to deal with him.  But he’s innocent. I’m not lying.”; title: “So you haven’t seen him for more than ten years?” asked Joshua, who had felt sorry for her.; title: “I haven’t seen him for twelve years,” she answered miserably.  “In fact, I was pregnant when he was kidnapped.  So he hasn’t seen his first born son.”; title: Then Joshua asked, “Is your son’s name Samuel Adam?”; title: “Yes,” she replied.; title: “I met him in the flying building,” continued Joshua.   “He was very kind to me.”; title: “Yes he is very kind,” said Sister Bianca, smiling for the first time.; title: After staying with Sister Bianca for a half an hour, Joshua got to his feet and said, “Well if I could help, I would surely do it. I would give up my life to save him.; title: “I know you would,” replied Sister Bianca, hugging him very tightly.  “Because you are the son of Joseph and Mary David.”; title: Finally, Joshua left Sister Bianca’s office.  His section was not far from her office.  So it was easy finding his way out.; title: When he was inside the main room of his section, he told his friends all about what Sister Bianca had told him concerning her husband.; title: “We knew all this,” said Samantha gloomily.; title: Then Emily came to Joshua and whispered, “Do you want to come with me?”; title: “Sure,” he answered, not knowing where he was going. But he was sure that he would be safe with her.; title: After they had left the room, she said, “Ah… I don’t know how I’m going to sleep with Samantha.”; title: Joshua laughed and said, “Well just put your head on the pillow and sleep. That’s all.”; title: “So where are we going?” he asked.; title: “Just want to show you The Holy Community building,” she answered, smiling.; title: She led him to a room full of chairs.; title: “These are flying chairs,” she explained.  “Just sit on one of them and then write where you want to go and they’ll fly to that place.  This building is huge.  So it would take you forever to get to where you want to go.  But if you use one of   these chairs, it’ll take only five minutes or less.”; title: This seemed to be a lot of fun. Therefore, he wanted to try one of them.; title: “One is enough for both of us,” said Emily, sitting on one of the flying chairs.  Then Joshua sat beside her. He put his arms around her, in case they would fall from the flying chair, they would fall together.; title: So she pointed out her controller at a little screen that was attached to the chair, and then she pressed a button.  The chair started flying immediately.; title: “Wow!” shouted Joshua excitedly. “That’s really interesting.”; title: “But you didn’t write any location name,” he said, pointing at her controller.; title: “I don’t have to write anything,” she answered.  “Because every place’s name is written in this controller.  You just have to press the right button.”; title: Suddenly, the chair came down to the floor.  They were standing near a big door.; title: She looked at him and said with a quiet voice, “You don’t want to pass this door.”; title: “Why?” he asked interestingly.; title: “Because it leads to the Devilist sections of the building.  They’re very dangerous for all of us.  This door separates our sections from theirs.  That’s why it’s called the ‘Separation’ door.”; title: “Well Brother Noah told me all this,” said Joshua, remembering when Brother Noah was warning him not to go to the Devilist sections.; title: “Good!” she replied.  “Let’s continue on our journey.”; title: “Oh!” said Joshua, with a happy voice.  “I just remembered to check my bag.  I want to see if I have a writer or not.”; title: “Well let’s go back then,” replied Emily happily.  So they put the chair in its place and then returned to their section.; title: While they were walking toward their section, Joshua said, “This is really Heaven!”; title: “Yes it is, oh my love,” replied Emily.; title: So they entered the room where Joshua and John would be sleeping in.; title: “Here it is!” said Joshua, dragging his bag toward Emily.  So they opened it.  Joshua didn’t open it when Brother Abraham had bought it for him at the New Jerusalem Store in Ottawa. So this was his first time opening it.; title: Inside the bag, there was a writer.  It looked exactly like the one that John had.; title: But then, Emily opened another bag, which was inside the bigger one.  There were clothes that couldn’t be folded.; title: “Flying clothes!” she shouted.  So Joshua looked at the clothes.; title: “But how can they fly?” he asked surprisingly.  That was another shock to him.; title: She looked at the clothes and explained, “They have little engines in them.  You can use your controller to control them.; title: They could take you anywhere you want.  I have clothes like them too.  All Jerusalemites have flying clothes.”; title: “When do you use them?” he asked.; title: She looked at him and replied, “Anytime.  Many people use them even inside the building.  They use them instead of the elevator.  You can also use them when there is a large crowd of people.  This will help you avoid the people.”; title: In Joshua’s bag, however, there was another device.; title: “This is a messenger,” she explained.  “You don’t need it in this world, but you could use it in the other world.; title: Since our devices don’t work in the other world, you won’t be able to call anyone who lives here.  So you could write a message to someone, and this device will fly to that person.”; title: After they had finished looking in Joshua’s bags, they decided to continue their journey around the building.  They used the same flying chair that they had used before.; title: But then, Emily decided to stop the chair near a multitude of doors.; title: “These are called ‘Favourite Rooms,’” she explained, as they opened one of the many doors and had entered in.  “You could come in here to do anything you like.  You could even come in here to read a book quietly.; title: Or, you could come with your girlfriend.”; title: “Can I pray here too?” asked Joshua, who had never prayed.; title: “Well yes…” she replied. “But the best place to pray in is the Holy section, which is also known as the ‘church area.’ Let’s go to it now.”; title: So they left that room.; title: At last, they stopped at a very big door.; title: Then Emily explained, “This door leads to the Holy section.” She opened the door with her controller, and they both went in. Then she continued her explanation, saying, “This section contains three churches: one for people who like to chant without any musical instrument.  This church is called ‘The Angelic Church.’ They sing Byzantine chants, I guess. The second church is for people who like to sing classical hymns.  This church is called ‘The Classical Hymn Church.’  Finally, the third church is for people who like contemporary worship music.  This church is called ‘The contemporary Church.’ There are other holy rooms in this section.  They’re used for quiet Bible reading, prayer and meditation.  Sometimes, people sleep in these rooms, and they get Heavenly visions or dreams. Many miracles take place in this area.”; title: There was a big party that night.  The whole building was in the restaurant.  Even the Magicians were there.; title: “Oh no,” Joshua told Emily, as they sat down in the big restaurant.; title: “What’s the matter, dear?” she asked in her sweet voice.; title: He hugged her and said, “The magicians are here.  They might do something dangerous.”; title: “Oh they won’t,” replied Emily.  “They can’t do any magic because we have many S.S.”; title: “What’s that suppose to mean?” he asked.; title: “Well S.S stands for ‘Spiritual Soldiers,’ because they can fight evil spirits, you know.”; title: Chapter 8; title: The First Miracle; title: At the party, two important people sat at the biggest table together. One of them looked like a king. He was wearing his royal robe, which had the flag of New Jerusalem painted on it. The other person looked like a Devilist. He had a snake painted on his shirt.; title: Just then, the whole place fell silent.  Brother Noah, the leader of the Holy Community building, was about to give a little speech.; title: “Good evening, ladies and gentlemen,” he began.  “Well welcome back to the Holy Community.” When he said the name ‘Holy Community’, some of the magicians had nasty looks on their faces, because they did not like it when this building was called by its Christian name.  Instead, they called it ‘The Devilist Community’.”; title: Brother Noah continued, “I pray that you will be blessed throughout the year.; title: First, I would like to welcome our two guests.  The first one is the leader of our country, King Solomon.  And the second guest is the representative of the Devilist community to the Jerusalemite government, and he is Mr. Satan.”; title: All the Devilists clapped their hands, but no one from the Christian community clapped.  Instead, some of them started laughing when they heard the name ‘Satan.’; title: Brother Noah continued, “And I have someone very special for you today.” He pointed at Joshua and went on, “This person is our victory against Beelzebub and his followers.  The Lord has given a great victory for us through this man.  As you all know, Beelzebub tried to kill him, but he lost all his magical powers. That man is with us today, and his name is Joshua David!”; title: The whole place was full of clapping and cheers.  Emily kissed him.  Many people were coming to shake his hands. Everyone was talking about him except the Devilists, who looked angry.; title: Many of the Christians were shouting, “Praise the Lord!  He sent us victory through Joshua David!”; title: After that, the Devilist community left the restaurant.; title: “Where are they going?” Joshua asked Emily.; title: “Well they’re only here for the introduction,” she answered.  “And after that they go to their own sections to worship the devil.; title: Did you see how mad they were when everybody was singing for you?”; title: “They worship the devil?” he asked, ignoring her question.; title: “Yes they do,” replied Emily.  “That’s where they get all their powers from, you know.  They can’t do anything without the help of the demons.  In fact, these demons live in them and in their sections.”; title: Joshua looked serious now.  So he said, “That proves that they are followers of Beelzebub.  Doesn’t it?”; title: “You’re right,” answered Emily.  “But if you say this in front of them, they’ll deny it.  In addition, Beelzebub is the biggest devil worshiper. So he’s their leader.; title: You see, we can’t kick them out of this building, because it also belongs to them.”; title: Then Brother Noah came to Joshua and whispered, “Is this your friend?” he pointed at Emily.; title: “Yes she is, sir,” replied Joshua, shaking with fear.; title: Then Brother Noah said to both of them, “Come with me please.  The king and the representative want to see you, Joshua.”  So they followed him to the table where King Solomon and Mr. Satan were sitting.; title: The king made Joshua sit beside him, and Emily sat beside Joshua.; title: Then Brother Noah spoke, “Joshua, don’t be afraid to speak to the king.  I know that in the secular world, kings are almost treated like gods.  But here, you should respect them as much as you respect me, not less or more.”; title: Then King Solomon shook Joshua’s hand and said, “Well nice to meet you, Mr.  David!”; title: Joshua was shocked to hear someone calling him ‘Mr. David’. He knew that ‘David’ was his last name, but no one had ever treated him like an important leader.; title: “Well nice to meet you too, sir,” replied Joshua, trying to sound happy.  He wasn’t sad or angry, but he was shaking with fear.  Why was the king in their building? And why did he want to see him?; title: “So how did you defeat the greatest magician of all time?” asked King Solomon?; title: “It wasn’t me,” replied Joshua.  “It was the Lord Jesus Christ…”; title: At that moment, Mr. Satan had fallen to the floor.  So Brother Noah helped him to get to his feet again.  Joshua didn’t know why Mr. Satan had fallen, but he stopped talking as soon as he heard him fall to the floor.; title: So King Solomon kept asking too many questions, but Joshua was enjoying the conversation. He was honoured to sit with the king of the greatest country in the world.; title: Mr. Satan, however, didn’t do anything to Joshua, but said, “Well the Devilist Community is now celebrating in their own sections.  So I must go and join them.” And he left the table angrily.; title: “That’s better,” laughed King Solomon.  “I don’t really like the Devilists, but I can’t force them out of my country, you know.”; title: After a little while, Joshua got used to talking with the King without any fear.; title: “But why can’t you force them out of the country?” asked Joshua.  “Aren’t you the King?  Can’t you do whatever you want?”; title: “No, sir,” Replied the King.  “Although I’M the King of the whole country, yet I can’t force them out of New Jerusalem, because it belongs to them as well.  The Lord told me that if I were to keep them, something great would happen.”; title: “A good thing or bad?” asked Joshua.; title: “Very good thing,” answered King Solomon. “But I don’t know what it is though.”; title: So Joshua asked again, “Could you force them to leave just this building then?”; title: King Solomon smiled and told him, “I can’t do that either, because even this building belongs to them too.; title: To be honest, the Devilist Community make up less than zero percent, you know.  There are only several hundred thousands of them, but we are numerous. Nevertheless, there’s a former Jerusalemite province that has about ten billion Devilists.”; title: “So how’s life in the secular world?” asked the King again.; title: “Very hard,” replied Joshua.  “Especially with my aunt and uncle.”; title: At this, the King laughed and said, “So were they Christians?”; title: “No,“ replied Joshua truthfully. “In fact, I didn’t know anything about Christianity until I met a girl at the school back there.  She told me a little bit about Jesus.  After meeting Jerusalemite people, however, I learned more.  I hope to learn even more about the Lord Jesus here.”; title: “Of course you will,” replied Brother Noah happily.  “So would you like to become a preacher in the future?”; title: “What’s a preacher, sir?” asked Joshua, who had poor knowledge about things.; title: Brother Noah looked at the king and said, “See, didn’t I tell you that the Bakers haven’t taught him anything about Christianity?”; title: Then he looked back at Joshua and told him, “A preacher is someone who has relationship with the Lord Jesus Christ, and has studied the whole Bible.  His job is to tell others about the Lord Jesus. He also speaks in churches.  He might even appear on the radio or the television.  But his main goal is to tell people about the Lord Jesus Christ, so that if they believe, they will go to Heaven after they die.”; title: “So is Pastor Moses a good example of a preacher?” asked Joshua, who liked the idea of preaching.; title: “Very close,” replied Brother Noah.  “But Pastor Moses is also a prophet.   He has also studied the Bible.  So yes, he is able to preach. In fact, he conducts all the worship services in this community.”; title: Then Brother Noah started talking to King Solomon.  So he turned his attention away from Joshua and Emily.; title: There was a little device on the table in front of them.; title: “What’s this?” asked Joshua, trying to forget about the magicians, because he was thinking about what the magicians would be doing now in their section.; title: Emily looked at it and explained, “This is called ‘The Food Device.’  You can write what you want to eat and it’ll come to you.  Use the buttons of this device to write.; title: And it’s almost time for dinner.  So it’s a great opportunity for me to teach you how to use it now.” So she started showing him all the buttons on the device.; title: “I don’t know what to choose,” he said, talking about food.  “So please choose something for me,” and she did.; title: Within a second, there were flying trays coming toward the tables.  A very big tray had landed in front of them.  There were many kinds of food on it including, steak, chicken barbecue, roasted lamb and many other things.  There were also cucumbers, olive oil and many other vegetables.  They even had large glasses of Pepsi.; title: So Joshua and Emily enjoyed their food together. It was like eating in a King’s palace. They ate everything that was on the tray.; title: Suddenly, the tray had disappeared.; title: “How did that happen?” asked Joshua, amazed.; title: Emily smiled at him and said, “There are many people and machines working in the kitchen.  These trays have little engines in them.  So they can fly.  But they also have little cameras too.  So the people who are working in the kitchen can see when the person is finished eating.  Then they take them back.  This is new technology.”; title: Then, other trays were coming toward them.  In these trays, there was ice cream, all kinds of chips, cookies, more drinks and other sweet stuff.  So Joshua and Emily ate and drank everything that was on their tray.  The tray had disappeared again.; title: “I’m full!” said Joshua happily.  “I’ve never eaten that much.”; title: This was Joshua’s favourite day in his whole life.  He was in the greatest country in the whole world.  He ate as much as he wanted.  He even had a girlfriend with him.  But the thing that made him feel happy the most was sitting with the king of the greatest country in the world.; title: Then, they all got up to go to sleep.  So Joshua and Emily got up too.  They were full and tired.  So they entered their section.  Then Emily and Joshua kissed each other, and each one went to his or her room.; title: “John?” said Joshua, getting into his bed.; title: “Oh hi, Joshua. So did you like the celebration?”; title: “It was my favourite day in my whole life,” replied Joshua.; title: He was in his bed thinking, what are the Bakers doing without him?  How would they feel if they knew where he was?; title: Finally, he fell asleep.; title: He had a very strange dream.  He dreamed that he was walking in a very big building.  He was holding olive branches in his hands.; title: But then he had another strange dream.  He was walking near the Separation door, which leads to the Devilist Community, but the door itself was not there.; title: He woke up early the next morning.  Subsequently, he decided to go to the main room in that section.; title: “Good morning, Samantha,” he said as he entered the room.; title: “O hi, Mr. David,” she replied, but not as sweet as Emily did.; title: “Just call me Joshua,” he laughed.; title: So he sat on one of the chairs and took a laptop.  He opened it and started playing with it, because he had never used a Jerusalemite computer before.  Thus, he didn’t know what to do with it.; title: Just then, Emily had entered the room.  Samantha was gone now.; title: “Good morning, sweetie,” he said.  She brought a chair, put it beside his, and sat on it.; title: “Hi, dear,” she smiled.  This was his true lover not Samantha.; title: Then they started playing with the computer.  Emily was teaching him how to use it.; title: Next, he told her about the two dreams that he had.; title: “Well we do get strange dreams here in New Jerusalem,” she told him.; title: After that, they got up and decided to go to the restaurant, since it was time for breakfast.  So Joshua and Emily sat together, across from John and Samantha.  Joshua used the device on the table for the second time, because Emily taught him how to use it the night before. This time, however, she didn’t help him with anything, because he knew how to order his food.; title: This device contained many buttons, and pressing anyone of them would bring a flying tray filled with the requested food.; title: After breakfast, Joshua and Emily, John and Samantha decided to go and see Brother Israel, because they didn’t know what courses they would be taking.  The next day would be the first day of school.; title: “Good morning, ladies and gentlemen,” said Brother Israel as he opened the door for them.  “Come in!”; title: They entered. Joshua and Emily sat together again.; title: Brother Israel knew why they wanted to see him, because he said, “Go to your profile and you’ll see all the information regarding your courses.”; title: “What profile?” asked Joshua, who didn’t understand what Brother Israel meant.; title: So Brother Israel looked at him and explained, “A profile is like a website that contains everything about you.  Everyone here in New Jerusalem has one.  You can also upload your own stuff to it.  But you must only upload what you want people to see.”; title: “So what’s my profile address then?” asked Joshua, who liked the idea of having his own website.; title: “Go on the internet,” responded Brother Israel.  “And the first thing that pops up is our community’s website.  So look for the ‘search’ box, and then type ‘Joshua David,’ and you will be taken to your profile.  Then you will be able to change anything that you want.”; title: So all four of them decided to return to their section.  Then they started using the computers, trying to find out what their courses will be.; title: Emily sat beside Joshua as usual.  She started teaching him how to go to his profile.; title: “You can access the internet from your little computer,” she said.  “So you can go to your profile from there and you could upload anything you want.  Your little computer has a video camera with it.  So you could record videos of what you’re doing, and then you could upload them to the Internet. That’s what journalists use to upload their news to the Internet immediately after they’re done filming or writing.”; title: The little computer that she was talking about was one of the things that were found in Joshua’s bag. Every person in New Jerusalem had a little computer. They could use it wherever they were. It was also connected to the Internet.; title: After that, Emily decided to tell Joshua some information about the Holy Community building.  Therefore, she began, “Everywhere in New Jerusalem, including in this building, there are video cameras everywhere.  These cameras are there, because it would be very easy for the police to find someone who have done something bad.  There are two kinds of these cameras:; title: The first kind is called ‘The private cameras,’ which no one can look at.  Only the police, and only when they really need to, they look at its videos.; title: The second is called ‘The Public Cameras’. This type of cameras is connected to the Internet.  Therefore, people can see what others are doing.  These cameras are located in public places, like the restaurant, the school, the church and other public places.  The private cameras, however, are only in rooms where people sleep and in the bathrooms. So if you’re in any of the public places, people all over the world can see you.”; title: Then, Joshua wanted to try out his flying clothes.  Therefore, he and Emily went to his room to get them.  After they had left the room, Emily forgot something.; title: “You should go back to your room and put them on,” she said.  “Because you have to change in a private place.” Therefore, he went back to his room.  Closing the door behind him, he started changing.  It felt funny wearing clothes that would not fold.; title: Then he came out of his room.; title: “You look very handsome!” shouted Emily, running to him to kiss him.; title: Then she gave him a little device and said, “This is called the ‘Clothes Device.’ Each button does something. But if you lose it, you can use your controller.  Oh, can you wait for me please?  I have to change too.”; title: As a result, he waited for her.  Then she came back with her flying clothes on. She looked extremely beautiful.; title: “Now,” she said, “We could use one device for both of us.  So we could move at the same speed.” Next, she pointed her device at both of them and pressed the “fly” button, and they started flying.; title: “Wow!” shouted Joshua, who was flying right beside her.  “This is really beautiful!”; title: Then they passed Brother Noah’s office.  As soon as he saw them, he called after them.  So they returned to his door.; title: “Great job, Joshua and Emily!” he shouted, as they landed on the floor.  “Well I need to talk to you this evening, Joshua.  And I don’t mind if you want to bring Emily with you, but you cannot bring anyone else, even if you choose not to bring her, because I don’t mind her being with you when I’ll be speaking.”; title: “Okay, sir,” replied Joshua frightfully.  “But what time?”; title: “At six,” replied Brother Noah.” And you don’t have to be afraid of anything. There’s nothing wrong.”; title: So they continued on their journey around the Holy Community building.; title: “What does he want from me?” Joshua whispered to Emily.  “And why are you the only one who is allowed to come?”; title: “You don’t want me to come?” she answered sadly.; title: “O this is not what I meant!” replied Joshua, who wanted to hug her but he  couldn’t,  because they were flying.  “I mean, what does he want to tell me that you’re the only one who could know?”; title: “I don’t know, dear,” she replied.  He felt happy again, because she said the word “dear,” and that meant that she wasn’t sad anymore.; title: That afternoon, Joshua and Emily were eating lunch when an old man was coming toward them.  He almost looked like Mr. Baker, but he looked even more horrible.; title: “Hi, Joshua!” he said, giving his dirty hand to Joshua to shake it.; title: “My name is Mr. Lucifer.  I’m from the Devilist Community. However, I like your people.”; title: “Nice to meet you, sir,” said Joshua, who was trying to sound happy, but he wasn’t.  He didn’t really like meeting magicians. Well no one in New Jerusalem liked to talk to them anyway.; title: “Well I have to go now,” said Mr. Lucifer.  “But if you need anything, I am under your service.”; title: After the man was gone, Joshua said to Emily, “And please don’t return again.”; title: Emily laughed.  Then she smiled at him and explained, “Well the name ‘Lucifer’ is one of Satan’s names.”; title: “So were I talking to Satan then?” he asked, laughing.”; title: “Of course not,” Emily laughed back.; title: “Why do we call him Satan then?” asked Joshua.; title: So she continued her explanation, “Well, in the Hebrew language, the name ‘Satan’ means accuser.  Before his fall, Satan would always accuse the other angels before the Lord.  That’s why we call him ‘Satan’ today. But ‘Lucifer’ is another name that we use for him.”; title: “But what did he mean when he said that he likes my people?” Joshua asked curiously.; title: “I think he means the Christian people,” replied Emily thoughtfully. “He can’t say the word Christian, since it has the word Christ in it.”; title: After they had finished eating their lunch, Joshua and Emily returned to their section. Samson and Isaac were drinking coffee and playing with the computers.; title: “Want to join us?” Samson asked Joshua kindly.; title: “Sure!” replied Joshua happily. So he sat beside Samson.; title: Then Samson played a very beautiful hymn on his computer. Joshua loved it. So he asked, “Who’s that singer?”; title: “Her name is Fairuz,” responded Samson. “In the Arab World, there’s a very famous singer named Fairuz. Everybody loves her music. So here in New Jerusalem, we have a similar singer who has the same name, but she sings in English instead of Arabic. I encourage you to listen to her in the morning, because you’ll feel like you’re in Heaven. She’s the queen of the morning.”; title: At five thirty that evening, Joshua and Emily were preparing to go to  see Brother Noah.  They didn’t tell anyone about where they were going.  Therefore, they knocked on his door.  After they were inside, Brother Noah said to Joshua, “Do you know what you did last night?”; title: Joshua was full of fear now.  Therefore, he answered, “No, sir.”; title: Brother Noah smiled and said, “There’s no reason for you to be afraid.; title: Do you know that you did a miracle last night?”; title: “A miracle?” replied Joshua, sounding shocked but happy at the same time, because he wasn’t in trouble.; title: “Yes, a miracle,” replied Brother Noah impatiently. “Do you remember when Mr. Satan fell to the floor?”; title: “Yes, sir,” replied Joshua.  “But I didn’t do anything.”; title: “Yes, you did,” replied Brother Noah, smiling.  “You used Jesus’s name.  Magicians can’t hear Jesus’s name.  It hurts them a lot.  So when you said Jesus’s name in front of a Devilist, Mr. Satan fell down, because the name of Jesus is the most powerful name.  That’s why we use this name to fight against evil spirits.  Many people use Jesus’s name in front of magicians, but nothing happens, but when you used it, something did happen.”; title: Chapter 9; title: Beelzebub; title: Brother Noah paused for a second and then continued, “So I’m thinking if we could put you in the spiritual army of the Holy Community.  However, you will have to take classes that teach you how to become a soldier for Christ. So what do you think?”; title: “I could try it,” replied Joshua, sounding relieved.; title: “Good,” smiled Brother Noah.  “I knew that you were going to say yes, because you’re courageous like your father!  He was in the Holy Community army.  You can try it for a week or two, and then you could decide if you want to be in it or not. So I will add the ‘Soldiers for Christ’ class to your courses.”; title: ““I’ve fallen in love with the right guy,” said Emily in a sweet voice, as they were leaving Brother Noah’s office.  “I’m sure that you’ll be the best soldier.  I think that the Lord wants you to be one of his soldiers who fight evil spirits.  The proof is that when you were baby, Beelzebub, who was full of evil spirits, tried to kill you, but the Lord Jesus saved you.  So there is something special about you, dear.”; title: That night, Joshua was preparing for the next day, which would be the first day of school.  In addition, he would be taking the ‘Soldiers for Christ’ class.  Emily was helping him to put all his stuff together.; title: “So I’ll be seeing you only during lunch time when we’re at school.”; title: “Yes,” replied Joshua.  “But we can spend the rest of the day together, you know.”; title: “Of course!” she shouted, and then she kissed him.; title: “So I’ll only need my writer for my courses?”; title: “Yes, dear,” she replied. Then she left.; title: “Hi, Joshua!” said John, as he entered the room.  “Are you tired?”; title: “I am,” replied Joshua.  “But I can talk if you want to chat.  I just can’t leave my bed, because I’m really tired and my bed is very warm.”; title: “I’m tired too,” replied John, getting into his bed.  “But I don’t mind talking either.; title: “So where were you with Emily at six thirty?”; title: Joshua told him all that had happened in Brother Noah’s office.; title: “Great!” said John loudly.  “So you’ll become a soldier for Christ!  That’s awesome, man!”; title: The next day, which was September the ninth, was the first day of school.  The school was supposed to start on September the eighth, but Brother Noah moved it to the ninth.; title: Joshua was the first person to get up that morning.  It was 6 o’clock in the morning when he got up.  The school would be starting at 8:30.; title: He was opening the door of the main room of that section when Emily opened it from behind.  Joshua was almost knocked to the floor.; title: “Oh sorry, dear,” she said, as she hugged him very tightly and led him into the room.; title: “No problem, dear,” he replied as he sat down beside her.  “And good morning.”; title: They all ate breakfast together in the restaurant with the rest of the people.  There were thousands of people in the restaurant that morning.  Many of them were very excited that the school was about to begin, but others looked normal.; title: Joshua, however, did not know how to feel.  He did not know if he was supposed to be happy or not.  This was a new school for him, and in a new country.  John had the same classes that he had.  So that was something to be thankful for.  Emily, however, was in a different grade.  She was in grade six, but he was in grade seven.  So they would not be seeing each other until lunchtime or after school.; title: Joshua and John decided to stay together as much as possible.  So that morning, they went to the school together.  They used the flying chairs to get there.  John used his controller to control both chairs, because Joshua was not good at it yet.; title: Their first class was called ‘The New Jerusalem Studies’.  They entered the class together.  Then, they sat beside one another.; title: There were no books, papers, or other writing items in this class, because people used their writing devices.; title: There were few magicians in that class as well.  Mr. Lucifer sat with them.  He was their assistant.; title: “Hi, Joshua!” he said, jumping to his feet and getting to Joshua.  “So you’re taking this class too? That’s great!  I’m here to help the magicians.  So if you need any help, please let me know, and I’ll be very happy to do so.”  Then he left, shortly afterwards.; title: “But why does he want to help me if I’m not a magician?” Joshua whispered to John.; title: “Don’t know,” replied John thoughtfully.  “I guess that he’s encouraging you to become a magician like them.”; title: “Never!” replied Joshua angrily.; title: “Good morning, everyone!” said the male teacher.  He looked very handsome and young.  He had a computer in front of him.; title: Then he continued, “My name is Mr.  Nebu.  In this class, you’ll be learning all about the country of New Jerusalem.  Whether you were born in New Jerusalem or not, this course will help you a lot in increasing your knowledge about this country.  In this course, we’ll be exploring the history, geography and politics of New Jerusalem.  Today, however, I’ll just give you an introduction to New Jerusalem.”; title: Then he paused for a second and asked, “Is there anyone who has been in New Jerusalem for less than a year?  I know that there is one.”; title: Joshua put his hand up.; title: “Joshua David!” shouted Mr. Nebu.  “What an honour to have you in my class!”; title: Then he returned to the subject.  “Now, before giving you the introduction to New Jerusalem, I would like to share my testimony with you all.  Twelve years ago, I belonged to the Satanic Soldiers.  So I was just as evil as they are.  But then I saw the power of the Lord Jesus…”; title: “Please don’t say this name again!” shouted Mr. Lucifer, because the students had fallen to the floor when Jesus’s name was mentioned.; title: “Well I have to say his real name,” replied Mr. Nebu, laughing very hard.  “All right.  I’ll say ‘The Lord’ instead.”; title: So then, he finished his story by saying, “And that’s how I became what I am now.” He wanted to say “Christian,” but he was afraid of the magicians.; title: After that, he decided to give them an introduction to New Jerusalem.  He began: “New Jerusalem is the biggest country in the world.  It’s not part of any of the seven continents.  The land area of just one city is immeasurable.  The population of one city is immeasurable as well.; title: The country of New Jerusalem is divided into quadrillion regions. Each region contains quadrillion provinces. Each province is divided into quadrillion districts, which each of them has about quadrillion cities in it. The region where we’re living now   is called ‘Christiania’,’ and our province is ‘Heaven,’ and finally, the name of our city is ‘Heaven City.’”; title: Joshua looked at John and asked, “Why did the magicians laugh every time the name ‘New Jerusalem’ was mentioned?”; title: “Well they don’t call it New Jerusalem,” replied John.  “I don’t know what they call it though.”; title: Before they could leave the class, however, Mr. Nebu called Joshua back into the class again.  Then he whispered, “I want to see you tomorrow at six o’clock.  You may bring only your best friend or friends.  Okay?”; title: “Yes, sir,” replied Joshua.  Then he left the class with John.; title: Their next class was “Soldiers For Christ.” The name was shortened to SFC.  So Joshua and John sat together again.  In this class, however, there were no magicians.  This made Joshua and John very happy.; title: “Good morning!” said the teacher as he sat on a chair facing Joshua.  “My name is Brother Paul.  I don’t want to be called “Mister, because I’m a pastor not a teacher.; title: Welcome to SFC! I’m very happy that there are no magicians in this class.  In fact, they can’t take the Christian classes, because they won’t survive.  They are full of Satanic spirits, and these spirits are enemies of the Lord.  So they can’t approach a Christian holy place.; title: In this class, you’ll be learning how to fight evil spirits.  The Bible commands us to resist the devil and he’ll run away from us.  But the Bible also tells us that our war is not with human beings, but with evil spirits. So we don’t fight with physical weapons.  Instead, we fight by the power of the Lord.; title: First, understanding demons is very important for us, because demons and evil spirits are the same thing.  So let’s talk about demons.  What are demons?”; title: John put his hand up.  “I think that they’re fallen angels.”; title: “That’s right!” replied Brother Paul.  “Long time ago, the devil was an angel in Heaven.  But then he decided to rise up against God.  One third of the Heavenly angels were on his side.  As a result, the Lord cast them down from Heaven.  Immediately, Satan became their leader, and they are known as demons.  They’re always trying to steal people’s hearts away from the Lord. Sadly, they are very successful in this job.  In the end, however, they will be thrown into the lake of fire forever.   So the Lord Jesus Christ will win the victory!”; title: He took a little breath and continued, “Now, being a soldier for Christ is not all about fighting evil spirits.  A soldier must also be able to do miracles and raze people from the dead.”; title: “Very interesting,” Joshua whispered to John when the class was over. He understood everything that Brother Paul had said, because he remembered when the Lord had appeared to him back in Canada.; title: “I know,” replied John.  “Biblical courses are always wonderful, you know.”; title: As they were leaving the class, Brother Paul came to Joshua and said, “Nice to see you, Joshua!  Brother Noah told me that you want to become a Soldier For Christ if it’s not very hard for you.  I think that you will be the best soldier.  Brother Noah also told me about the miracle that you did in that party.  And I know that Beelzebub couldn’t kill you.  So that’s what makes me think that you’re the perfect person for the job.”; title: John smiled at Brother Paul and said, “I think that Joshua will even become the leader of the Christian army, sir.”; title: “You’re right!” replied Brother Paul, smiling back at him.  “But you don’t have to call me ‘sir’, you know.  I’m just a servant of the Lord.”; title: After this class, they would be having lunch.  So Joshua and John would be seeing their girlfriends.; title: “I have an appointment tomorrow evening,” Joshua told Emily as they sat in front of John and Samantha at one of the restaurant tables.  Mr. Nebu wants to see me.  Do you want to come with me?  He told me that I could bring only my best friends.”; title: “So am I your best friend?” asked Emily, laughing.; title: “O more than that!” smiled Joshua.  “You’re my beloved!”; title: “Aw?” she said, hugging him.  “You’re so sweet.”; title: “So are you coming with me tomorrow?” he asked.; title: “For sure!” replied Emily happily.  “Well I don’t expect to have any homework these days.  So I’m able to come with you, dear.  But what time though?”; title: “Six o’clock,” he replied.; title: “Okay then,” she said.; title: “Great!” replied Joshua happily.  Then they continued eating their lunch. Both of them were eating pizza.  As usual, Joshua was drinking coffee and Emily was drinking tea.; title: The next class after lunch was “Basic Beliefs And Teachings of Christianity,” which was shortened to BBTC.  Even though John knew all the basics of Christianity, yet he still wanted to take it, because he sought to add to his knowledge.; title: They entered the class happily, and sat together again.  There weren’t many people in that class.  It was probably because most of the people who lived in the Holy Community knew already all the basics of Christianity.; title: “Good afternoon ladies and gentlemen,” said a man, who looked about 25 years old.  His voice, though, sounded like the voice of a 40 years old man.; title: “My name is Brother James.  I don’t want you to call me ‘Mister,’ because I’m only a servant of the Lord.  So I’m your brother, if you don’t mind.”; title: Everyone laughed.  Brother James continued, “Well welcome to the BBTC class.  In this course, we’ll be exploring the basic beliefs and teachings of Christianity.  It doesn’t matter whether you know a lot or little about Christianity.  You’re still welcomed in this class.  Even though you think that you know all the basics of Christianity, you’ll be surprised to discover that   you don’t know everything.  So this class will strengthen your faith in the Lord Jesus Christ.; title: In this course, we’ll be talking about the history of Christianity, and then we’ll talk about what we believe.  We’ll also explain the Trinity.”; title: Joshua put his hand up.  “The what?” he asked, not knowing what the word “Trinity” meant.; title: Brother James looked at him and explained, “The Holy Trinity is one God, who reveals himself in three persons.  They are the Father, the Son, who is Jesus Christ, and the Holy Spirit.  We’ll be talking about this later.  So don’t worry.”; title: Then he looked at the rest of the students and said, “Today, however, I’ll just give you a short sermon, answering the five W’s and the H. So here they are:; title: First, Who created me?; title: Genesis 2:7 says, ‘Yahweh God formed man from the dust of the ground, and breathed into his nostrils the breath of life; and man became a living soul.’; title: So from this verse we learn that God is our creator.  He created each one of us.  Some of us were created blind, deaf, black, white, male and female and all other kinds of people; but we were all created by the same God.; title: We know that God is good.  So if we hate someone just because they’re not like us, we’re saying to God, ‘what’ve you created is not good!’  If God is good then, why can’t we be good?; title: Since God is our creator, that means that we’re all his children, but after we sinned against him, we became the children of the devil, because we listened to him instead of listening to God!  After you open your heart to Jesus though, you become a child of God once again!  After that, the Bible tells us in Romans 8:35-39 that, “Who shall separate us from the love of Christ? Could oppression, or anguish, or persecution, or famine, or nakedness, or peril, or sword?”; title: Even as it is written, "For your sake we are killed all day long. We were accounted as sheep for the slaughter."; title: No, in all these things, we are more than conquerors through him who loved us.; title: For I am persuaded, that neither death, nor life, nor angels, nor principalities, nor things present, nor things to come, nor powers, nor height, nor depth, nor any other created thing, will be able to separate us from the love of God, which is in Christ Jesus our Lord.; title: So nothing will be able to separate you from the love of Christ!; title: Second, How did God create me? Again, we’ll use the same verse, which is in Genesis 2:7, ‘Yahweh God formed man from the dust of the ground, and breathed into his nostrils the breath of life; and man became a living soul.’ So we were created from the dust of the ground, and we have the breath of life! Also, Genesis 5:1-2 said, “This is the book of the generations of Adam. In the day that God created man, he made him in God's likeness. He created them male and female, and blessed them, and called their name ‘Adam’, in the day when they were created.”; title: So in these verses we can see that the Lord God created us according to his image and likeness.  God created many other things, but only human beings were created according to his image, because all the other things were created for us to enjoy.  That’s why we say that only humans have an eternal life either in heaven or hell. Animals don’t live forever.  Only humans do.  Animals can’t think, but we can.; title: Third, Why was I created? Isaiah 43:7 tells us that we were created for the glory of God.  We were created to honour and give him thanks. But after we sinned against him, we weren’t able to love him anymore, because we became the slaves of the devil, and he stopped us from getting closer to God.; title: However, after Jesus died for our sins and rose again, anyone who opens his or her heart to him will become a child of God once again!  Isn’t that great?; title: So we were created to live holy lives according to the word of God and not according to our desires!; title: Angels live according to how God wants them to live.  So if the same God who created the angels created us too, then why shouldn’t we live according to his word?; title: Since God is our Creator, we don’t really enjoy life if we’re not close to him.  The devil cannot show you kindness.  He doesn’t love you.  He wants you to go to hell after you die to be with him forever!  But our Lord and saviour, Jesus Christ, gave up his life for you to save you from the power of the evil one and his kingdom, which is in hell!; title: Fourth, What am I suppose to do with my life on the earth? Well, I almost answered this question in the previous one.  We must live according to the word of God, which is the Bible.; title: Fifth, When will I die? Well no one wants to die, but we must die.  God has decided how much each one of us will live.; title: Job 14:5-6 said, “Seeing his days are determined, the number of his months is with you, and you have appointed his bounds that he can't pass; look away from him that he may rest, until he shall accomplish, as a hireling, his day.”; title: These verses are telling us that God has already decided how much each one of us will live.; title: Sixth, Where will I go after death? In John 3:16-18, Jesus told us, “For God so loved the world, that he gave his one and only Son, that whoever believes in him should not perish, but have eternal life.; title: For God didn't send his Son into the world to judge the world, but that the world should be saved through him.; title: He who believes in him is not judged. He who doesn't believe has been judged already, because he has not believed in the name of the one and only Son of God.”; title: So all you need to do is to accept God’s gift of salvation!”; title: This class was over now.  But Joshua and John enjoyed this sermon, even though it was very long.; title: Their next and last class was called Sermons.  It was taught by Pastor Peter, who was the brother of Pastors Paul and James.; title: “Good afternoon, boys and girls!” he said excitedly, as they were all getting organized in their seats.; title: “So did you like my two brothers?” he asked Joshua and John, who were facing him.; title: “Who are they, brother?” inquired John.; title: “Pastors Paul and James,” answered Pastor Peter surprisingly.  “Didn’t they tell you that I am their brother?”; title: So then he turned to the rest of the students and began, “In this class, I’ll be preaching sermons on different topics from the Bible.  So you’ll learn many useful things about the Bible.”; title: The rest of the afternoon went very well.  Joshua didn’t think that these courses would be too hard for him, even though he didn’t know anything about Christianity or New Jerusalem.  He thought that this school was much better than all the schools of the secular world, where teachers are very mean to their students.; title: He explained to John: “In the secular world, teachers are very mean to their students.  They make them work very hard, and they also give very hard homework.  So many people fail their courses. My point is that schools over there are really boring. It’s like being in prison.”; title: “Wow!” replied John, sounding astonished.  “Well here they try to make it as easy as possible.  And we only take the courses that will help us to become what we want in the future.  They treat us very kind.  They don’t give us a lot of homework.  Also, they don’t force us to do our homework, because if we fail, it will hurt us - not them.  But they give us help in anything we ask for.  We can also do research on the Internet. So school is very easy here.”; title: The first day of school was very good.  Joshua really enjoyed his classes with John.  He liked all of his courses and teachers.  In the first class, however, he didn’t like the fact that there were some magicians there.; title: After they had rested for a half an hour, Joshua asked Emily, “Is there a place full of people?  I want to go there.  I’m tired of being with only few people.”; title: “Well in the restaurant,” she answered.; title: “Is it always open?” he asked.; title: “Yes,” she replied.  So they wore their flying clothes and set off to the restaurant.; title: On the way, however, they met Brother Noah, who was walking behind them.; title: “Can I have a quick word with you, Joshua?” he said, standing beside Joshua.; title: “Sure!” said Joshua gladly.; title: “I want to see you right now, if you don’t mind,” said Brother Noah.  “It’s good news.  You can bring Emily with you as well.”  So they followed him to his office.  Then Joshua and Emily sat beside each other as usual.; title: Brother Noah looked at both of them and told them, “Do you remember when you visited the Bobs back in Canada?  Well Brother Abraham told me that they were very nice.  He wished that we could bring them to live here, but they’re not Evangelicals, you know.”; title: “But why can’t non Evangelicals come to New Jerusalem?” interrupted Joshua.; title: Brother Noah smiled and replied, “Because our country was founded on Biblical principles, but the other denominations are not all Bible Believing people.; title: So we disgust the matter with the king.  Then we also prayed about the matter.  The Lord told us that we may bring Christians from other denominations to New Jerusalem, but they cannot live with us in our sections.  So the Bobs will be coming very soon. but they won’t live with us.  Instead, they’ll have their own section.”; title: “So that’s still in this building,” replied Joshua. “Right?”; title: “Right!” said Brother Noah.  “They’re still much better than the magicians, you know.”; title: This news of the Bobs coming to New Jerusalem, however, didn’t make Joshua happy at all.  In fact, he felt very sad.  He said to himself, “What would Emily Bob say if she finds out that I’m in love with another girl?  I don’t want to hurt her feelings.”; title: After Brother Noah had finished talking about the Bobs, Joshua and Emily decided to continue on their way to the restaurant.  When they had entered the restaurant, everybody’s eyes fell on Joshua.  The restaurant sounded empty, because everyone was quiet when Joshua was there.; title: “Hi Joshua!” said a voice, coming toward them.  It was Samuel, the boy that Joshua had met in the flying building.  He was the son of Sister Bianca.; title: Joshua and Samuel shook hands.  Then they all sat together.  Samuel sat on Joshua’s left and Emily on his right as usual.; title: “So what’s new?” asked Samuel.; title: “Nothing really,” replied Joshua.  “I don’t want to hurt your feelings or anything, but can you tell me about your father please?”; title: Samuel looked at him and said in a gloomy voice, “Well I have never seen my father.  He was kidnapped before I was even born.  The Satanic Soldiers kidnapped him, and we don’t know where he is.  They want us to send someone to give up his life for him.  Many of our great brothers in the Lord chose to give up their lives to save him, but the Satanic Soldiers don’t want to tell us where to send these brothers.”; title: He was crying very hard.  His story and tears touched even Joshua.; title: So then, Emily went over to him and gave him a big hug, saying, “He’ll come back one day.  Nothing is impossible with the Lord.”; title: That evening, Joshua asked Emily, “Are there any books that talk about Beelzebub?”; title: “I’m sure there are,” replied Emily.  “We just have to find them. So let’s go to one of the favourite rooms.”; title: As they were walking, however, they saw John coming toward them.; title: “Where are you going?” he asked, walking beside Joshua.; title: “You can come with us if you want,” said Joshua quickly.  “But please don’t bring anyone else with you.” Emily understood that he was referring to Samantha.  So they all walked together until they found an empty room in the Favourite section.  Then they sat near a computer.  Emily started looking for something about Beelzebub on the Internet.  Finally, she found an article called, “A Summary of Beelzebub’s life.”; title: Then they began to read:; title: In the city of Beelzebubia, which was located in the province of Beelzebubia, there was a small house on 666, Satan Street.; title: The father of the house was Balaam and his wife was Jezebel.  They had no children.  So they lived alone together in their house.; title: One day, both of them dreamed that they were carrying a child. Two days later, however, they both dreamed that they were in the hospital, and Jezebel was ready to give birth to a child.; title: On the night of September 4, 2012, Jezebel was having a painful time.  She didn’t move from her place, because she couldn’t do anything.  Therefore, Balaam had to buy food from the restaurant, where he worked.; title: Even her family came to help her.  Although her husband was very helpful, yet they still wanted to see her.; title: The next day, they rushed to the hospital.  Jezebel couldn’t help it.  But how is she going to have a child if she’s not pregnant?  Where will the child come from?  What kind of a child will he or she be?  All these questions filled her mind and her husband too.; title: When Jezebel was in the hospital, she fell asleep for 15 minutes.  She had a dream in which she heard a scary voice saying, “Ha-ha!  This child is unusual…”  She didn’t see anyone, but she only heard the voice.; title: Meanwhile, Balaam was gone with Mr. Ibblees, who was his father-in-law, to a place of sweets, which is known in Canada as Tim Horton’s.  But Mrs. Ibblees, Jezebel’s mother, stayed with her.  So Balaam told her to call them when the child is born.; title: After Jezebel woke up, she told her mother about her dream about the scary voice, and her mother was really afraid of the matter.  She didn’t know what to do.; title: Then Mrs. Ibblees called her husband and told him all about the dream that Jezebel had.  He didn’t know what to answer, because this is the first time that a thing like this has ever happened.  After he finished talking with her, he turned around and looked at Balaam.  He was really disappointed.  He didn’t know what to say.; title: “What’s the matter, sir?” asked Balaam.  “Is everything all right?”; title: “Hmmm…” Mr. Ibblees shook his head.  Then he told him about the dream.; title: So they decided to go to the hospital to see Jezebel.  When they entered her room, she was crying with her mother.; title: Balaam went to the doctor and told him about the dream.  The doctor went in to see Jezebel.  The doctor was a female.  Then she said, “There’s nothing wrong with her or the child.  She will give birth in two hours from now.  Then she left the room.; title: At 2 P.M, a boy was born to Balaam and his wife.  The child looked fine, and there was nothing unusual about him. They called his name Beelzebub.; title: Chapter 10; title: How It All Happened; title: The article continued:; title: One day, the king of Usa had a terrible dream.  In the dream, he only heard a voice, which said, “one day, someone will kill the King of Usa with his magical powers.”; title: Therefore, the King wondered about who that person could be. When he woke up the next morning, he told the dream to everyone who lived in his palace.  No one could interpret the dream.  Then the King put the news on his website for everyone to see, because that was his way of telling the journalists about his news.  So all the T.V and radio stations were talking about the dream.; title: Then one of King’s servants said to him, “Your majesty, please listen to my idea.  I can’t interpret the dream for you, but I can tell you what to do to save yourself from that magician, whoever he is.  Kill all magicians who live in Usa, and then you’ll be safe.”  Therefore, there were no magicians left in Usa.; title: One day, when Beelzebub was about 17 years old, he had a very strange dream.  He heard someone saying to him, “Follow me and you’ll have many unusual powers.  You’ll even overthrow the King.  Then you’ll take his place.; title: Therefore, Beelzebub decided to go to visit the King.  Then he put a curse on him and the King was dead.  Suddenly, the whole country of Usa was full of evil spirits.  They were attacking everyone and saying, “Follow King Beelzebub and you’ll live!”; title: Then, Beelzebub thanked the devil and said, “Now I know that you’re the strongest one!  As soon as I take power, I’ll let everyone in Usa worship you alone!”; title: He became the King of Usa. All the days of Beelzebub’s rule were filled with evil. He forced everyone in the country to become magicians.  So there were demons everywhere.; title: One day, however, something strange happened that ended Beelzebub’s rule in the country of Usa.  Then after this strange thing had happened, everyone who lived in Usa became Christians.  Only few thousands of families didn’t.’; title: And that’s where the story ended. But there was a little note at the bottom of the page that said, “The author of this article died before he completed it. That’s why it’s so messy.”; title: “But the article didn’t say how the whole country became a Christian country,” said John.; title: “Well the article wasn’t written very well either,” replied Emily; title: “So New Jerusalem was called Usa at that time?” asked Joshua.; title: “I think so,” replied John.; title: So they thought about that article about Beelzebub.  They had many unanswered questions.  What caused the fall of Beelzebub as king of Usa?  Why did all the people decide to become Christians?  Why did they change the name of the country from Usa to New Jerusalem?; title: They kept thinking about these things and returned to the restaurant for dinner.; title: Emily left Joshua for a little while.  So then, many girls came to him.  They were arguing about who should sit beside him.  They didn’t think that anyone of them was worthy to sit with him, because they thought that he was very special.; title: “Hi Joshua!” said one of them as she sat on his right side.  “My name is Tierney.” She was very short but very pretty.  In fact, some of the Devilist students made fun of her because she was so short.; title: “Nice to meet you, Tierney!” he said happily as they shook hands.; title: He liked her, but not as much as Emily though.  Yet he was very happy to meet her.; title: “I’m the daughter of Brother Paul!” she continued.; title: “O he’s one of my teachers!” said Joshua excitedly.  “He teaches SFC.”; title: Joshua liked her more now that he found out that she was the daughter of one of his teachers.; title: “So what grade are you in?” he asked interestingly.; title: “Grade seven, sir,” she replied.  “I’m in your SFC class!”; title: “You don’t have to call me sir, you know,” he said.  “I’m just a student.”; title: So then, Joshua and Tierney started talking to each other as if they were best friends.  She told him how much the Devilists liked to make fun of her because she was very short.  This made Joshua to like her even more because she was being persecuted. So he felt sorry for her.; title: After they finished eating dinner, Emily asked, “Did you fall in love with Tierney?”; title: “Of course not,” he said, hugging her.  “How could I ever love someone other than you? But she was very pretty and kind.  The Devilists like to make fun of her.”; title: “We’ll let her become one of our best friends then,” replied Emily.; title: The next morning was the second day of school.  It was September the 10th.  Joshua was very happy to learn more about Christianity.; title: So he entered the main room in his section and saw Emily sitting at a computer. But she didn’t see him.; title: “Good morning, dear,” he said, sitting beside her. “How are you this morning?”; title: “Very good, dear,” she replied, turning to look at him.  “What about you?”; title: “Very good, thanks,” he replied, giving her a very big hug.; title: Just then, John had entered the room.; title: “Where’s Samantha?” asked Joshua, finding it unusual that Samantha wasn’t with him.; title: “Well…” he replied miserably.  “She’s not being very nice to me these days, because I didn’t take her with me when I came with you to read about Beelzebub.”; title: “Did you tell her where you were though?” asked Joshua interestingly.; title: “Yes,” replied John furiously. “I told her everything.”; title: Then Emily smiled very hard and shouted, “Wonderful! Hallelujah! Forget about her.  We’ll find you a better one.”; title: Joshua looked at John and told him, “Well last night, I met a very pretty girl named Tierney.  Emily knows about her.”; title: “Good one!” said Emily, smiling at John.  “Yes!  Tierney is very pretty!  Talk to her and see what she’ll say.  If she doesn’t agree, we’ll let Joshua to talk to her, because I’m sure that she’ll listen to him. She’s always sad, because the Devilists are always making fun of her.”; title: “Oh I can do that.” Said Joshua, agreeing with Emily.; title: “But I’m not done with Samantha yet,” said John, smiling at both of them.  “So don’t go too fast.”; title: After breakfast, Emily hugged and kissed Joshua and left.  So he and John went their way as well.; title: They went to their first class, which was The New Jerusalem Studies.  The magicians were already there.; title: “Good morning, class!” shouted Mr. Nebu as he sat on his chair.  “Well it’s great to begin the second day with more introductions about New Jerusalem.”; title: Next, he checked to see who was attending and who was not.  Then he continued, “As I told you yesterday, New Jerusalem is the best and the largest country in the world.  In fact, people consider it a different world.; title: About four thousand years ago, people from different parts of the world started coming to live in New Jerusalem.  They had many children.; title: But then Beelzebub was born.” When he had said the name of ‘Beelzebub’, all the magicians smiled, but he ignored them.  So he went on, “Beelzebub was visited by Satan, and he was given many magical powers.  Then he went and killed the King of Usa, which is known today as New Jerusalem.  after that, he became the king of Usa.  Seeing that Satan was helping him a lot, he established the religion of Devilism.  So he ordered all the people to worship Satan.  Then Satan started giving magical powers to many of them.  Most people were full of evil spirits.  So there was magic everywhere in this country.; title: One day, an unusual force stopped all the magical powers.  No one could do magic on that day.  Then a voice was heard throughout the country, saying, ‘Repent! Repent!  The end of this land is very near! Repent of all the evil that you are doing!  I am the Alpha and the Omega.  I am the first and the last.  I am the beginning and the end.  I am Jesus Christ!’  So then, all the people repented and asked the Lord to forgive them. Only one province still followed the religion of Devilism.”; title: Meanwhile, the magicians weren’t paying attention to what Mr. Nebu was saying.  That’s why he wasn’t afraid to say the name of Jesus.; title: Then Mr. Nebu resumed the talk: “So then the Lord sent few preachers to this country.  They taught many people, and then many started becoming preachers.; title: The Lord said, ‘If the whole country keeps my commandments, I’ll make you the richest and the best nation in the whole world.  People will not believe how much I am blessing you.’; title: That’s how we have all these blessings today.  The technology is one of the greatest blessings that the Lord has ever given to us.; title: After the people saw how much the Lord was blessing this country, they decided to change its name to New Jerusalem.  New Jerusalem is described in the Bible as Heaven.  This country is a representation of Heaven on the earth!”; title: After Mr. Nebu had finished talking, Joshua and John went over to his desk and said, “We read an article about Beelzebub yesterday. It said the exact information that you just told us!”; title: Joshua and John really enjoyed this class.  Their next class was SFC, which stands for “Soldiers For Christ.”; title: Tierney was there too.  So Joshua and John sat very close to her.; title: “This is Tierney that we were telling you about,” Joshua whispered to John. So he introduced them to one another.; title: “Good morning, brothers and sisters!” said Brother Paul as he sat on his chair.  He had his controller, the Spiritual Weapon, the writing device and his computer with him on his desk.; title: Then he began to talk: “So today we’ll be continuing from where we left off yesterday.; title: As I said, Satan has many demons, and they’re always attacking Believers.  But they hate the Jerusalemite Christians more, because this country belonged to them, but then all the people converted to Christianity.; title: Another reason why they hate us is because the Lord has blessed us more than any other country.”; title: He drank a little bit of coffee and continued, “We’ve rented a magical section for practice.  So after you’ve learned how to fight evil spirits, we’ll go to that section, and you’ll sleep there.  This section is filled with evil spirits and very scary things.  As soon as a Christian enters this section, many terrible things start happening.  So then, you’ll have to fight them spiritually.  Any questions?”; title: Joshua put his hand up in fear and asked, “What if we don’t win?”; title: “Nice question!” replied Brother Paul gladly. “Well you won’t be going alone.  A real spiritual soldier will accompany each student.; title: So I promise you that you’ll leave the section safely.”; title: After this class was over, they went to the restaurant to eat lunch.; title: When Joshua sat beside Emily, he told her everything that he had learned in both classes.; title: “So you’ll have to go into one of the magical sections?” she asked, astonished.; title: “Yep,” replied Joshua.  “But we’ll be accompanied by spiritual soldiers.  I’m not worried about anything.”; title: After they finished eating lunch, they rested for ten minutes and then each one went his own way.  So Joshua and John went to the BBTC class, which stands for Basic Beliefs and Teachings of Christianity.; title: Brother James was waiting for them.; title: “Good afternoon brothers and sisters! I thank the Lord for everything.; title: Before we begin this class today, let’s pray that the Lord will help us to understand his truth.”; title: So everybody stood up to pray.; title: “Father God, we come this day to learn about your truth.  Your word is the truth.  Teach us what you want us to learn about you.  We thank you for sending your only Son, our Lord Jesus Christ, to die for our sins.  Your loves endures forever.  Your faithfulness endures forever.  In Jesus’s name, we pray.  Amen!”; title: They all sat back in their chairs.  Then Brother James began: “Today, I’ll give you only a summary of Christian history.; title: According to the Bible, in the beginning, God created the Heavens and the earth and everything in them.  Then the Lord God created a man in his image.  He formed this man from the dust of the earth and then God breathed into him the breath of life.  So next, this man became a real human being.  After that, God knew that it wouldn’t be good for the man to be alone.  as a result, he decided to make a helper for him.; title: He made this man fall asleep, took one of his bones, and created a woman for the man.  So the man was called Adam, and his wife Eve.; title: The Lord made a very beautiful garden, and they lived in it.  There were all kinds of trees in that garden.  The Lord told them not to eat from the tree in the middle, and if they would do eat from it, they would surely die.  He’s talking about spiritual death, which means to be far from God.; title: One day, Satan appeared in a form of a serpent to Eve.  He told her that nothing would happen if they eat from that tree.  So she took, ate, and gave to her husband.  Thus, man listened to Satan instead of his creator.; title: Disobeying God is called ‘sin’.  The Bible tells us that the result of sin is death.  Therefore, after they sinned against God, spiritual and physical death entered the world.  God is endless being.  Thus, sinning against God results in an everlasting punishment in an everlasting fire.; title: Nevertheless, God still loved humans, because they were his creation.  For this reason, God didn’t want them to go to hell.  As a result, he decided to send his only Son, Jesus Christ, who is the second member of the Trinity, to die and take away the sins of the world.  Jesus was crucified on the cross.  He suffered a lot.  Although he was God the creator, yet he chose to become a human like us and then die for our sins.  My point is that innocent man died for the sins of the whole world.  But he rose on the third day, and then he sat at the right hand of God the Father.  One day, he will judge the whole world.  Those who opened their hearts to him will go to an everlasting life, and those who reject him will go to an endless fire.; title: Any questions?; title: Joshua’s hand was up again.  “Where do I find the story of the Lord Jesus Christ?”; title: Brother James smiled at him and said, “You can find the story of the Lord Jesus in the four Gospels, which are four books from the Bible.; title: And now, let me give you some important information about the Bible.; title: The Bible was written over a period of 1600 years.  People wrote their parts in the Bible as the events happened.  About forty different authors wrote the Bible, but they all wrote by the help of the Holy Spirit. So the real author of the Bible is God.; title: The Bible contains sixty-six books.  It is divided into two sections:; title: The first section is called The Old Testament, which talks about what happened from creation until before the birth of Christ; title: The second section is called The New Testament, which contains the life and teachings of the Lord Jesus and his followers. It also contains the Beliefs and teachings of Christianity.; title: You can read about the life and teachings of the Lord Jesus in the first four books of the New Testament, which are called the Gospels, which means ‘Good News.’ You can find the story of the crucifixion in Matthew chapters 27 and 28, Mark 15 and 16, Luke 22 to 24 and John 18 to 21.”; title: “I love the Lord Jesus Christ,” Joshua whispered to John.  “I’ve never seen an important person, such as a king; die for people who don’t deserve it.  I’m willing to follow the Lord Jesus - no matter how hard it may be.”; title: Brother James heard him saying all these things.  So he went over to him and said, “You don’t know a lot about the Lord Jesus, yet you love him from all your heart.  What will you do after you’ve learned more things about him?  Well may the Lord bless you for your faith.” Then he went back to his desk.; title: Before the class was over, Brother James decided to show them the ‘Word Of God’ library. This digital library contained over a million Christian books, articles and other Christian literature. These texts were written by hundreds of thousands of the most influential preachers in New Jerusalem. The purpose of these writings was to help those who want to become preachers. These texts covered all Biblical topics.; title: But before these authors began writing, they prayed and fasted for a whole week, asking the Lord to help them to interpret his holy word correctly. They didn’t want to misinterpret God’s holy word.; title: Most preachers in New Jerusalem don’t go to schools that teach Bible courses, because the Word Of God library contains everything that they need to know about the Lord Jesus, the Bible, or the Christian faith. There is a copy of this library on every computer or reading device.; title: Joshua and John’s last class for the day was Sermons, which was taught by Pastor Peter.; title: Tierney was also there.  So John kept looking at her. He seemed to be interested in her.; title: “Good afternoon brothers and sisters!” he shouted at the students as they were entering the class.  “I know that many of you are taking the BBTC class.  So you know that we’re all sinners.  I’m sure that you also know about Jesus’s sacrifice to save us from an everlasting punishment in hell.  Today, however, I’ll be talking about the next two important steps in your Christian life. They are:; title: 1. How can I be saved?; title: 2. How should I live after salvation?”; title: He paused for a second and then began preaching:; title: “First, how can I be saved?; title: There are many views on how to be saved.  Each religion has its own ideas about salvation.  All of them require many steps.  So it’s not easy to be saved according to their teachings.; title: But what does the Bible say about salvation?; title: The Bible has much to say about this subject. In fact, Biblical pages are filled with the subject of salvation.; title: One of my favorite verses in the Bible is in Romans 10:8-10 that says, ‘but what does it say? The word is near you, in your mouth and in your heart: that is, the word of faith of which we are the preachers:; title: Because, if you say with your mouth that Jesus is Lord, and have faith in your heart that God has made him come back from the dead, you will have salvation:; title: For with the heart man has faith to get righteousness, and with the mouth he says that Jesus is Lord to get salvation.’; title: So all you have to do is to confess that you’re sinner, ask Jesus Christ to come to your heart and change your life, because 2 Corinthians 5:17 says, ‘so if anyone is in Christ, there is a new creation; the old things have passed away; behold all things have become new.’; title: As soon as you open your heart to Jesus Christ, your name will be written in the Book of Life, and you’ll be sure that as soon as you leave the world, you’ll be with Jesus Christ in heaven!; title: The Lord loved you and he came to die for you.  We deserve to go to  hell, because the Bible tells us in Romans6:23 that,  ‘For the wages of sin is death: but the gift of God is eternal life, through Jesus Christ our Lord.’”; title: Then Pastor Peter went and whispered to few people.  No one heard him.  But he returned after five minutes.; title: “Let’s continue!” he said, as he sat back at his desk.; title: “The second step in our Christian life is how to live after we’ve opened our hearts to the Lord Jesus Christ.; title: Here is what you have to do:; title: Read the Bible every day. Speak to the Lord as you’re speaking to your father. Ask him to help you to live according to his will. Finally, you’ll have to find a group of believers who will help you to do whatever God wants you to do. You don’t need to worry about this here, however, because we live in an Evangelical country.; title: Let’s talk about these things now.; title: Why should I read the Bible every day? Reading the Bible every day is very important, because it contains everything that God wants you to do.  It will also change your life.  You’ll love your creator even more, and you’ll enjoy the life with him every day.; title: Why should I speak to the Lord as I’m  speaking to my  father? God is not interested in written prayers.  He wants you to speak to him.  You’ll make some mistakes at first, but then you will get used to it.; title: Do you enjoy talking to your friends and parents?  Well, you’ll enjoy talking to Jesus Christ more than talking to anyone else. Just thank him for saving you from an everlasting fire.  Ask him to give you whatever you need, because he said in Matthew 7:7, ‘ask and it will be given to you.’; title: Ask him to help you to live according to his will: Every day, ask him to help you to do whatever he wants you to do.  This is very significant thing to do, because then you will become a true Christian.; title: Then you’ll be able to do what Matthew 5:16 said,  ‘Even so let your light shine before men; that they may see your good works, and glorify your Father who is in heaven.’; title: Finally, you’ll have to find a group of believers who will help you to do whatever God wants you to do. Yes, you will need to find a church that teaches what the Bible says.  Then you’ll be a true Christian.  You can find this church in this country easily.; title: Remember, none of these things will take you to heaven, but when you opened your heart to Jesus Christ, your name was written in the Book of Life.  Your good works will prove that you’ve chosen to live according to the word of your creator, Jesus Christ!”; title: It was 3:30 in the afternoon of the same day when Sister Bianca asked Joshua to go to her office.; title: “Can I bring two of my best friends with me, please?” he asked.; title: She smiled at him and said, “Well I’m alone most of the time.  So I don’t mind at all.”; title: So Joshua ran back to his section and told John and Emily to come with him to Sister Bianca’s office. They followed him.; title: When they were sitting beside Joshua, Sister Bianca shouted, “John and Emily!  Your parents are our best friends!  And…” she stopped right there.; title: Joshua knew that she was going to say something very important, but she stopped.; title: So John smiled at her and asked, “Why did you stop when you said ‘And?’  Please tell us.”; title: She started crying and replied, “Your parents are our best friends.  They wanted to give themselves into the hands of the Satanic Soldiers so that my husband could be freed.  But I didn’t let them.  The first couple that we loved was already gone.  So we didn’t want to lose another one.”; title: Joshua asked, “Who was the first couple?”; title: “Your parents,” she replied, still crying.; title: Then Joshua looked at her sadly and said, “So my parents, the Abrahams and you were all best friends?”; title: “Not just friends,” she replied, feeling better.  “In fact, we were almost like brothers and sisters.”; title: So then, Joshua whispered to John and Emily, “Well I don’t want to lose you, because our parents were almost like brothers and sisters.”; title: Sister Bianca smiled at all three of them and said, “Since you’re best friends, could you please add my son to your group?  Because we and your families were like brothers and sisters.”; title: All three of them liked this idea.; title: After that, they went back to their section.  They decided to get some rest before going to see Mr. Nebu at six o’clock.; title: At six o’clock, Joshua, John and Emily were ready to go to Mr. Nebu’s office.  Samantha wanted to go with them, but John didn’t let her, because she wasn’t from Joshua’s best friends.  This made Emily very happy, as she didn’t like being with Samantha.; title: So they knocked on Mr. Nebu’s door.; title: “Come in!” he said.  Joshua opened the door and entered in. John and Emily followed him.; title: “So John and Emily Abraham are your best friends?” asked Mr. Nebu as John and Emily sat beside Joshua.; title: “Yes they are,” replied Joshua.; title: “Well may the Lord bless you,” he pointed at John and Emily when he said this.; title: Then he began: “Do you remember when I was telling the class my testimony?  Well I couldn’t tell them what happened that made me choose to follow Jesus, because it had something to do with you.”; title: “Something about me made you want to become a Christian?” asked Joshua, shocked.; title: “Not exactly about you,” replied Mr. Nebu.  “But when Beelzebub murdered your parents, I was there.  After they were dead, he turned his attention to you.  You were only six months old at that time.  Beelzebub pointed his knife toward you, but he suddenly fell down to the floor.  His hands froze.  He was also speechless.  Then the rest of the Satanic Soldiers took him and ran away from the building.  I didn’t follow them.  That meant that I was no longer a Satanic Soldier.  Next, I went and told Brother Noah all that had happened.  But as soon as they had learned that I was a Satanic Soldier, they decided to put me in prison.  However, after they had discovered, through the private cameras, that my testimony was true, they released me.  So then I was chosen to teach the ‘New Jerusalem Studies’ course.”; title: “And then what happened?” asked Joshua seriously.; title: “I don’t know,” replied Mr. Nebu.  “No one told me anything.”; title: “But how can I trust that you’re telling me the truth?” asked Joshua.; title: “Go to Brother Noah,” replied Mr. Nebu happily.  “He’ll be able to show you the video.”; title: Joshua took John and Emily with him and they began traveling to Brother Noah’s office.; title: On the way to Brother Noah’s office, Emily said, “Well I can’t see the video.  I can’t watch people dying.”; title: “What if he’s not telling the truth?” asked Joshua.; title: “No I can’t come,” replied Emily.  I’ll wait outside for both of you.”; title: “All right, dear,” Joshua gave her a hug.; title: So they knocked on Brother Noah’s door.  He opened it to them and looked surprised.; title: “All right, Joshua?” he asked in a worried voice.; title: “Yes, sir,” replied Joshua.  “I just want to know something.”; title: “Well then come in.” Brother Noah led them into his office.; title: Joshua and John sat together.; title: Joshua began: “I was in Mr. Nebu’s office.  He told me that he was there when my parents died.  Is that true?”; title: “Of course,” answered Brother Noah, getting to his feet.  “I’ll show you the video if you like.”; title: “Yes, please,” said Joshua, getting to his feet as well.  John followed him.; title: Brother Noah played the video on his computer.  In the video, there was a man and a woman sitting on a couch.  There was a little baby sleeping on the same couch beside the woman.  Both the man and the woman looked about eighteen or nineteen years of age.; title: “These are your parents,” said Brother Noah.; title: Suddenly, about ten men entered the room where Joshua’s parents were sitting.; title: “The oldest man is Beelzebub,” explained Brother Noah. “And the other ones are his followers.”; title: “Don’t do anything!” said Beelzebub to the other men.; title: Joseph and Mary, Joshua’s parents, started screaming.  Beelzebub did some sort of magic that killed Joseph and Mary.  Then he turned his attention to the little baby.  He used the same kind of magic, but nothing happened.  He was very surprised.; title: “My lord,” said one of the men to Beelzebub. “Let’s leave this place.  The God of this boy is trying to save him.”; title: “Save him?” laughed Beelzebub coldly.  “I am more powerful than any other god!  Satan has given me many powers that no other god has!”; title: Next, Beelzebub tried all kinds of magic to kill the little baby, but they all failed.  Finally, he decided to use physical things to kill him.  he took a knife from his pocket.  However, as soon as he pointed it at the little baby, he fell down to the floor.  He became speechless.  His hands were frozen.  Suddenly, nine of his servants carried him out of the building.  The tenth man, however, didn’t help or follow them.  He was Mr. Nebu.; title: So that is how it all happened.; title: Chapter 11; title: The Christmas Surprise; title: After the video was over, Joshua and John started crying.; title: “Where are my parents now?” Joshua asked Brother Noah sadly.; title: “With the Lord Jesus,” replied Brother Noah cheerfully.; title: “So they’re not in hell?” asked Joshua, still crying.; title: Brother Noah looked at him with a big smile on his face and replied, “The children of Christ don’t go to hell.  Hell is only for the children of the devil.”; title: Joshua then brought Emily into the office, because the horrible video was over now. She sat beside him, and was touched by his tears.; title: It was very hard for Joshua watching his parents die. He felt guilty because he wasn’t old enough to save them. His heart was broken.; title: As he was wiping out his tears, he asked Brother Noah, “What else do you know about my parents?”; title: Brother Noah said, “Well it’s a long story.  I recommend that you drink something while you’re listening.”; title: “A coffee with no sugar, please,” said Joshua, still very sad. He didn’t want sugar in his coffee because he was mourning for his parents.; title: Within a second, a tray containing three cups of coffee and a cup of tea was coming toward them.  Then it sat on the table in front of Brother Noah.  Then each one of them took a cup.; title: After they all had begun drinking, Brother Noah began: “Your father, Joseph, was born on December the first, 2180 and Mary was born on December the twenty-fifth of the same year.; title: Joseph was born in Hamilton, Ontario, where you lived.  His family wasn’t religious at all.  At the age of 15, a preacher from New Jerusalem was sent to him.  The preacher told him all about the Lord Jesus Christ.  Then Joseph opened his heart to the Lord.  The preacher also told him about New Jerusalem. Therefore, Joseph wanted to go to New Jerusalem.  His family, however, didn’t want to let him go.  They didn’t mind if he became a Christian or not.  They only didn’t want to let him go away from them.  At that time, however, he was very stubborn like most teenagers.  So he forced them to let him go.  He told them that he would come and visit them whenever the time would let him.; title: He gave the preacher his last word.  The preacher told him, “I’m not returning to New Jerusalem yet, because I still have to do some preaching here.”; title: The preacher went to another house and found a very beautiful girl. She was about fifteen years old as well. He preached the Good News to her and her family.   But she was the only one who opened her heart to the Lord and she was even willing to go to New Jerusalem.; title: On his last day in Canada, the preacher took both of these people with him.  The boy was your father and the girl was your mother.”; title: “But who was that preacher?” interrupted Joshua.; title: “It was me,” smiled Brother Noah.  Then he carried on: “So I introduced them to one another.  At the age of eighteen, they got married.  Then on August the twenty-ninth, 2200, you were born.  On March the seventh, 2201, your parents were murdered by the evil, Beelzebub. On March the fourteenth, Sister Bianca and I took you to the Bakers.”; title: Brother Noah had a break from talking. But then something caught his attention.; title: “Joshua?” he inquired, looking at Joshua’s hair. “Did the Bakers cut your hair?”; title: “Yes?” Said Joshua, still thinking about his parents.; title: “Do not cut it from now on!” Explained Brother Noah angrily.; title: But Joshua was busy thinking about his parents. That’s why he didn’t ask ‘why?’ Nevertheless, he listened to Brother Noah.; title: It was eight o’clock.  So they decided to leave Brother Noah’s office.  They returned to the restaurant for the dinner.; title: Joshua didn’t look happy at all.  His parents’ death made him very sad.  He didn’t even eat a lot that night.; title: He kept thinking what would’ve happened if they were alive? He wouldn’t have been famous. But he didn’t care about popularity; the only thing he wanted was to be with his family – just like any other boy.; title: “Are you all right, dear?” asked Emily as she sat beside him.; title: “I’m fine,” said Joshua sadly.; title: Whenever Emily would be sitting with him, he would keep looking at her the whole time that she was with him. He would also hug her a lot. Now, however, and for the first time, he didn’t even look at her, since his whole mind was focused on his parents.; title: She understood why he was sad, but she stayed with him; even though he didn’t care about her at that moment.; title: Even John was very sad.  He didn’t eat too much either.  He felt sorry for Joshua.  He kept his head down the whole time that he was in the restaurant.; title: After they finished eating, Emily hugged Joshua all the way back to their section.  John followed them.  Then they sat down in the main room of their section.; title: Trying to change the atmosphere a little, Emily smiled at John and said, “Guess what?”; title: “What?” said John, trying to smile back at her. He put his head up now.; title: Then she smiled very hard and told him in a grateful voice, “I saw Samantha in one of the Devilist sections today!”; title: Joshua became interested in the story, even though Samantha wasn’t his friend.  So he asked, “When did you see her?”; title: “When you were in Brother Noah’s office,” she answered truthfully.; title: John looked very angry now.  “How do you know that she’s one of them?  What if she were only visiting them?”; title: “I have an idea!” shouted Joshua.  “Mr. Lucifer likes me very much, and he said that he’ll do whatever I ask.  So I’ll ask him about Samantha.”; title: “Great idea!” shouted Emily, as she went to sit beside him. Seeing that he was no longer sad, she put her arms around him.; title: So then Joshua called Mr. Lucifer into their room and said, “Do you know anything about Samantha Gabriel?”; title: “I don’t know, sir,” replied Mr. Lucifer truthfully.  “But we do have Samantha Smith in our Community.”; title: “Could you show us a picture of her, then?” asked Joshua.; title: “Sure!” replied Mr. Lucifer happily.  “But can I use one of your computers to do this?”; title: There were ten computers in that room.  Only six of them were used.  So they let him use the seventh one.  Mr. Lucifer started looking for Samantha Smith.; title: “There!” he showed them a picture.  There was a girl in that picture who looked exactly like Samantha.; title: “She’s always with you,” said Mr. Lucifer.; title: “Yes!” replied John angrily.  He finally found out that his girlfriend was part of the Devilist Community. She tricked him by telling him that she was Christian.; title: “Thanks a lot, sir,” said Joshua.  “That helped a lot.”; title: “My pleasure, sir,” replied Mr. Lucifer as he left the room.; title: “So she’s one of them!” understood Joshua.  “And she hasn’t told us anything.”; title: “Hallelujah!” shouted Emily.  “She’s gone!  We won’t see her again!”; title: After they had calmed down, Joshua said to both of them, “Should we call Tierney then?  I’ll talk to her first.”; title: “Sure!” answered Emily.  “John is very sad now.  His heart is broken very badly.  So if she decides to love him that might cheer him up a little.”; title: “Come with me, Emily,” said Joshua as he got to his feet.  “Let’s go and find her.  “But you, John, stay right here.” So they left their room.; title: As they were walking, however, they saw a beautiful girl walking in that same hallway.; title: “Can we call her instead of Tierney?” asked Emily.  “I know her very well.  She’s in all of my classes.  Her name is Sarah.”; title: “Okay!” whispered Joshua so that no one could hear him.; title: Then Emily went over to Sarah and said, “Hi Sarah!  This is my friend Joshua!”  So Joshua and Sarah shook hands.; title: “You don’t need to tell me who this great man is,” Sarah told Emily, smiling.; title: Joshua looked at her nervously and said, “Could we have a little chat right now?”; title: “Sure, sir!” she replied, following him to the restaurant. Her heart was beeping very fast. Why does the famous Joshua David want to see her?; title: At the restaurant, she sat on his left and Emily on his right.  Then he began: “Do you know Emily’s brother, John?”; title: “Of course I do!” she replied happily.; title: Joshua continued: “Well he lost his girlfriend.  He loved her very much, but then he learned that she’s part of the Devilist Community.  So he’s very sad. Are you single?”; title: She smiled nervously and answered, “Yes.”; title: Joshua asked,  “Well John is a very nice guy.  He’s a Christian, as you know.  So what do you think of choosing him?”; title: “I have to talk to him privately first,” she answered.  “And then we’ll see what we can do.”; title: Realizing that his plan had worked, Joshua got up so that Emily and Sarah could sit beside each other and talk.  He did this because he wanted to write a letter to John, and he didn’t want Sarah to see him.  So he took out his controller, which was also used as a cell phone.  He wrote him an email that said:; title: Dear John,; title: I have found you a very pretty girl. Her name is Sarah.  She and Emily are best friends.  I told her all about you.  So she wants to have a private conversation with you.; title: Please send me an answer as soon as possible.; title: Your friend,; title: Joshua David; title: John read Joshua’s message and he was very happy. So he wrote back:; title: Dear Joshua,; title: I want to thank you for all your work for me.  So please bring her to me.; title: In Christ,; title: John Abraham; title: Joshua then told them to follow him to their section. He entered the main room followed by Sarah and Emily.; title: He whispered to Emily, “We have to leave this room for now, because they want to have a private conversation together.”  Then, they left the main room.; title: “Why did Brother Noah command me not to cut my hair?” Joshua asked Emily, after they had left the room where John and Sarah were talking.; title: “I’m not sure, dear,” replied Emily sweetly. “Let’s go and see him.”; title: So Joshua followed her to Brother Noah’s office.; title: “Are you okay, Joshua and Emily?” Brother Noah asked in amusement, because it was almost ten in the night.; title: “Ummm…” began Joshua nervously. “Why did you tell me not to cut my hair?”; title: “It’s too early for you to know,” smiled Brother Noah. “But I promise you that you will know the reason one day. The Lord told me to wait.”; title: On September the eighteenth, Emily was very happy, because it was her eleventh  birthday. Her parents, Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah came to celebrate with her.; title: Joshua went to the shopping place with Samuel to buy something for her.; title: “Hmmm…” he told Samuel. “I’m not sure what to buy for her.”; title: So they started walking around the shop, looking for something to buy for Emily.; title: “Come here!” shouted Samuel. So Joshua followed him into a store that sold bracelets and rings. Samuel explained, “Here in New Jerusalem, if a boy gives a girl a bracelet and a ring that means that he loves her. If she takes his gift, then she’s agreeing to become his girlfriend.”; title: “Thank you very much!” shouted Joshua, getting closer to the table where the bracelets and the rings were. “That helped a lot!”; title: But then he remembered that he had never bought anything here in New Jerusalem on his own.; title: “But I have no money on me,” he told Samuel.; title: “My friend,” replied Samuel, smiling, “This is not the old world. But this is the new world! You don’t need money in here. Use your controller. There’s a button on it that if you press it, all your information will be sent to the owner of the store. That’s how we buy here.”; title: So Joshua took out his controller, and pressed the ‘buy’ button. Then he bought a bracelet and a ring.; title: “You don’t have to buy both of them,” laughed Samuel. “One is enough.”; title: “I know,” replied Joshua. “But I love her more than you could ever imagine.”; title: They continued walking around the shopping place. Finally, they stopped at a store that was called ‘Heavenly Smell!’ It sold perfumes.; title: Joshua bought a box containing about ten bottles of perfume. It was called ‘Heavenly smell,’ because it smelled so good. Many people say that they feel like they’re in Heaven when they smell it. They also said that it is the best perfume in the whole world. Therefore, if a boy buys it for his girlfriend that means that he is really in love with her. Even if that girl doesn’t like him, she will after he gives her this gift.; title: This perfume is very special. So when a boy buys it for a girl, she will treat him like a special man, because he has bought her something very special.; title: “What else should I buy?” asked Joshua.; title: “O you’ve bought enough,” smiled Samuel. “Emily won’t believe how much you love her.”; title: Next, they stopped at a store that was called ‘Sweet Stuff For Your Beloved.’ So Joshua bought a box containing all kinds of candy. Then he ordered another box of chocolate. Both boxes had the same pictures painted on them. It showed a boy and a girl hugging each other. They were smiling.; title: At the Holy Community Building, there were many empty rooms. So one of these rooms was chosen for the celebration of Emily’s birthday that night. Many people helped with bringing chairs and tables into that room. Then they decorated the tables with all kinds of flowers. Next, they brought many candles and put them on the tables.; title: Brother Abraham invited many people to celebrate with them. They included: Brothers  Noah and Israel, Pastor Moses, Sister Bianca and her son Samuel,  and Emily’s teachers. But Brother Abraham also gave permission for John to invite anyone he wanted. So he brought in all of his teachers, who were also Joshua’s teachers.; title: After everyone had finished wishing her ‘happy birthday,’  Joshua took all of his gifts with him and went to sit with Emily.; title: “Happy birthday, dear!” he shouted, hugging and kissing her. Then he put all the presents on the table in front of her.; title: When she saw all the gifts that he had bought for her, tears started filling her eyes. He had just proven to her how much he loved her.; title: The rest of September was very good.  Even October and November went well as well.; title: In the month of December, however, the whole building, excluding the Devilist Community, was preparing for Christmas.; title: “No Christmas tree?” Joshua asked Emily on December the eleventh.; title: “Not in this country,” she replied.  “We celebrate the true Christmas.  Christmas is about the birth of the Lord Jesus Christ - not about Christmas trees.”; title: “So Christmas is about the birth of the Lord Jesus?” Joshua asked, shocked.  “I didn’t know that.”  The Bakers did celebrate Christmas, but they never told him the true meaning of Christmas. The only thing that they cared about was Santa Claus. So this was all new to him.; title: Joshua took Emily to an empty room.  They sat near a computer.; title: “Can you tell me how Jesus was born?” he asked.; title: So she began: “Well, more than 2200 years ago, there lived a woman in Nazareth, in the country of Israel.  She was engaged to a man from the Family of King David.  Her name was Mary, and the man’s name was Joseph.”; title: “The same names as my father and mother!” shouted Joshua excitedly.  “And my last name is David as well!”; title: “Right!” smiled Emily.  Then she went on: “One day, however, an angel of the Lord appeared to Mary and told her that she would be having a child.  But she answered the angel, ‘How is this going to be if I’m not married yet?’  But the angel told her that the child would be from the Holy Spirit.; title: At the same time, the ruler of that country gave an order that all the people must go to their towns and register to be taxed.  Now, since Joseph was from the family of King David, he had to go from Nazareth to Bethlehem, which was very far.  So on their journey to Bethlehem, Mary was about to give birth.  They looked for a place for her, but they couldn’t find any.  Finally, they found a manger.  And that’s where the Lord Jesus Christ was born.”; title: “So the King of Kings and the Lord of lords was born in a place where sheep and cows lived?” asked Joshua, finding it very hard to believe.; title: “That’s right!” replied Emily. “You can read this story in Matthew chapters  1 and 2, and Luke 1 and 2.”; title: “This proves how humble our Lord was!” shouted Joshua, as they were leaving that room.; title: That night, Joshua had a very scary dream.  He dreamed that there were people walking in the Holy Community.  They looked like they were from the Devilist Community.  They were cursing any Christian that they could see.  And that curse meant death.; title: Then he suddenly woke up.  The building was full of screams.; title: “John!” shouted Joshua.  “Get up!  The magicians are killing our own people!”; title: “Leave your rooms at once!” he heard Brother Noah say.; title: So they left their rooms. Joshua knocked on the girl’s door in section 1994, but there was no answer.; title: “Emily! Sarah!” he shouted.  But there was no answer.  So he used his controller to open the door.  He entered the room, but to his astonishment,  there was no one there.; title: Then he and John left their section.; title: “Go to the church area!” shouted Brother Noah.  “It’s the safest place for you now!”; title: So all the Christians went to the church.  But the magicians were ordered to go to the restaurant.; title: They were all in the church area now. Many people were mourning for their loved ones.; title: Pastor Moses took the microphone in his hand and declared, “Brothers and sisters.  You might not know why you’re here, but we have been told that some Satanic Soldiers have entered the building, and they have attacked some of our own people.”; title: “This is exactly what I dreamed this night!” Joshua told John.; title: Pastor Moses continued, “So we have to search out the whole building for these Satanic Soldiers.  The only section that they can’t enter is the church section, because it really hurts them to be in the presence of God.  They don’t even have keys to open the doors of this section.  So that’s why we’re here for now.”; title: John turned to Joshua and inquired, “What did you see in the dream?”; title: “I saw some magicians walking in our sections,” Joshua stated. “Then they started putting death curses on many Christians.  After that,  I woke up and heard people screaming.”; title: Next, Joshua and John  started looking for Emily and Sarah among the people in the church area. But Emily and Sarah could not be found.; title: As they were walking, they met Pastor Moses. Joshua decided to tell his dream to him.; title: “I had the exact dream this night,” Pastor Moses confirmed to  Joshua.; title: Suddenly, a group of teachers came into the church area.  They were carrying many huge boxes.  Brother James was one of the teachers.  Joshua asked him, “What are these?”; title: “Tombs!” replied Brother James, weeping very hard.; title: Each of the huge boxes had a name written on it.; title: Then Joshua found a tomb that was written on it: “Emily Abraham, age 11, was found dead on hallway number 1900.”  Hallway number 1900 was near Joshua’s section.  When Joshua had read this writing, he knew that it was his Emily.  So he bent over the tomb and started crying.; title: John came to him and said, “What’s the matter?”; title: “Emily’s dead!” replied Joshua, crying very hard.; title: They both cried for ten minutes and then started reading the writings on other tombs. One of them said, “Sarah Terah, aged 11, was found dead in hallway number 1900.”; title: And another one said: “Samuel Adam, aged 12, was found dead near the end of hallway number 1900.”; title: So Emily, Sarah and Samuel were all dead now. According to Joshua and John, this was the worst day in history.; title: “But how were the Satanic Soldiers able to get into our sections?” Joshua asked John.; title: John was still crying, but he replied, “Only the leaders can open all the doors in this building.  The two leaders are Brother Noah, and the other one is from the Devilist Community, but I don’t know his name.  Maybe he gave the Satanic Soldiers his controller or something.”; title: “Why isn’t he on our side?” Joshua wanted to know.; title: “All the magicians say that they’re against the Satanic Soldiers,” answered John.  “But they’re liars! Both the Devilists and the Satanic Soldiers are all followers of Beelzebub.”; title: The day that this event happened was December the 12th.  It happened at two o’clock in the morning. So they were all asleep when the Satanic Soldiers had  entered the building.; title: Pastor Moses spoke again: “Brothers and sisters!  Mr. Baal, the leader of the Devilist Community of this building has been fired out of his job! He helped the Satanic Soldiers to break into our building!”; title: “So each building has two leaders?” asked Joshua. “One is for the Christians and the other one for the Devilists?”; title: “Right,” replied John, who had stopped crying by now. “But not all buildings have Devilists living in them, because they’re a minority group.”; title: So they spent the rest of the night in the church area. Joshua and John stayed together all the time. Their friends were all dead now; so they didn’t want to lose one another.; title: The next morning, the restaurant was divided into two sections - one for the Christians and the other one for the magicians. This was done because Brother Noah was afraid that the Devilists might hurt a Christian person. He didn’t trust them anymore.; title: “Good morning, ladies and gentlemen,” said Brother Noah in the microphone.  “I have some very important announcements.; title: First, we searched almost the whole building, but we didn’t find anyone.  However, we’re still searching the living sections.  So don’t go to your sections until we tell you to.  We’ll also let you know where you may go and where you can’t go.  The Spiritual army is here.  So you’ll see Spiritual Soldiers everywhere in the building.; title: Second, Mr. Baal, the leader of the Devilist Community of this building, was fired last night.  We discovered that he was the one who let the Satanic Soldiers into our sections.; title: In the end, I advise you to be very careful wherever you go in this building.”; title: So the Holy Community building was full of Spiritual Soldiers.  They were there to protect the people from the Satanic Soldiers.; title: Joshua talked with them a lot. He told them that he wanted to become a Soldier For Christ as well.; title: “It’s not easy, you know,” said one of them. “You have to work very hard. But because you’ve defeated Beelzebub, then it’s not too hard for you, I think.”; title: Joshua and John woke up on Christmas day.  They weren’t happy at all, because many of their friends, including Emily, Sarah and Samuel, were dead.; title: So they went to the restaurant for breakfast. Tierney came and sat with them.  She loved Emily and Sarah very much.  So she was very sad now.  She decided to sit beside Joshua, because Emily wasn’t there.; title: “Merry Christmas, dear,” she said quietly.; title: “Merry Christmas to you too,” replied Joshua sadly.  He was very disappointed because his first Christmas in New Jerusalem had turned out to be a day of mourning.; title: After they finished eating, Brother Noah came to them and said, “Merry Christmas!  Christ the Lord is born! Hallelujah!; title: Now, I need you to come with me.”; title: So they followed him.  He took them to a place that looked like a garage.  He pointed at two cars and stated, “One for you, Joshua, and the other one for you, John!  Merry Christmas!”; title: Then he looked at Joshua and confirmed, “This car belonged to your father.”; title: “Where did mine come from then?” asked John.; title: “I bought it for you.” Smiled Brother Noah.; title: “I don’t want something that is very new,” replied John.  “Give it to Joshua. He’s more special than I am.”; title: But Joshua looked at him and stated, “My father’s things are better than new things.”; title: Next, Joshua turned to Brother Noah and asked, “Why are you so happy?  Aren’t you sad for all those who were murdered?”; title: But Brother Noah smiled even harder and explained, “I understand what you mean and how you feel. But follow me and you’ll see another gift.”  So they followed him out of the garage.; title: He stopped at a door and then said, “Open it and enter the room!”; title: So Joshua and John opened the door of the room.; title: “Emily!” shouted Joshua, as he ran and sat beside her. He gave her a very big kiss and a hug.; title: Chapter 12; title: The First Practice; title: “How did you come back to life?” he asked as he sat beside her.; title: She smiled at him and said, “Well Merry Christmas!  I wasn’t really dead.”; title: “Not really dead?” asked Joshua, shocked.; title: She smiled again.  “Well the Satanic Soldier curse doesn’t always work very well.  Some of those who get it don’t die.  They only freeze.  It’s almost like sleeping. So magic doesn’t work all the time.”; title: “So tell me,” began Joshua. “What happened that night?”; title: She told him, “Well Sarah and I left our room to go to the washroom. While we were walking, we heard someone screaming. So we left our section and went into the big hallway to see what was going on. We saw many Satanic Soldiers murdering our own people. When they saw us, they rushed to us and put a curse on us. And that’s how we died. However, it didn’t feel like we were dead or anything; instead, I felt like I were asleep. We woke up this morning. But when Brother Noah saw us, he told us not to leave this room, because he wanted to surprise all of you.”; title: Meanwhile, John was talking to Sarah, who had come back to life as well.  Even Samuel was alive now. All those who were murdered by the Satanic Soldiers on December the twelfth were now alive again.; title: Many considered it to be a victory against the devil. Jesus proved himself to be more powerful than the devil.; title: Many Devilists, however, were disappointed, since their leader was defeated. Some of them began questioning the power of Satan.; title: Then Joshua went to see Brother Noah, who was in his office.; title: “Can I say something, sir?” said Joshua, sitting on a high chair in front of Brother Noah.; title: “Of course,” answered Brother Noah, who had stopped looking at his computer and had given his attention to Joshua. Joshua said, “Well, all those who were murdered by the Satanic Soldiers are now alive again.  So tell all the magicians about this, and see who will be sad.  Then we’ll know who did it.”; title: “Great idea…” replied Brother Noah.  “But we know that it was Mr. Baal who did it.  He was the leader of the Devilist Community in this building, you know.  He opened the doors for the Satanic Soldiers.”; title: That afternoon, Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah had arrived at the Holy Community Building. They were very happy that their daughter was alive now. Another reason why they came was that they never missed the Christmas celebration in this community. In fact, they never missed any important celebration.; title: During lunchtime, Joshua sat with Brother Abraham. John was also sitting with them. But Emily was sitting with her mother where all the women were.; title: “Guess what, guys?” smiled Brother Abraham at Joshua and John. “We’ll be spending our last summer in Canada this year.”; title: Then he pointed at John and continued, “Your mother and I have decided to leave the embassy and return to live here. I’m tired of living in the world where it’s very hard to talk about precious Jesus. The people of that world would talk about anything but Jesus. Very few of them are believers.”; title: “O no!” said John gloomily. “You don’t have to return, you know.”; title: Joshua laughed at him and said, “Well if I were you, I’d be very happy if my parents would come to live with me.”; title: John said to his father, “We have our own section. So we can’t sleep with you.”; title: “I know,” replied Brother Abraham happily. “Don’t worry. You can stay with your friends. Most of the children here do the same thing.”; title: “Oh so it’s a common thing for friends to sleep together here?” Asked Joshua surprisingly.; title: “Yep,” smiled Brother Abraham, as he was cutting a piece of pizza. “Well that’s what most children do here, you know.”; title: After lunch, Joshua and John decided to take Brother Abraham to their section. They explained to him where each one of them slept.; title: “Well then…” explained Brother Abraham. “All that Sarah and I need is a section that has only  one room. You, John, can stay with your brothers and friends here.”; title: “What about my sister Emily?” laughed John, thinking that his father has forgotten about Emily.; title: Brother Abraham answered, “In the Bible, the word ‘brother’ means both brother and sister. So when I said ‘your brothers,’ I meant both brothers and sisters.”; title: After that, Joshua decided to stay with Emily as much as possible, because he hadn’t seen her for twelve days. To him, however, it seemed like twelve years.; title: That night, Pastor Moses gave a very interesting sermon on the subject of Christmas.  So he began: “What does the word ‘Christmas’ mean?; title: The word ‘Christmas’ comes from two languages.  Let’s break it up into two words to understand its meaning.; title: In the Greek language, the name ‘Christ’ means, ‘the anointed one’.; title: Then in Latin, the word ‘Mass,’ which makes up the second part of the word ‘Christmas,’ means ‘Feast.’; title: So now, if we put ‘Christ’ and ‘Mass’ together, we’ll get the meaning of Christmas, which is ‘The feast of the anointed one.’; title: What is the history of Christmas?; title: After Adam and Eve sinned against the Lord, he decided to send his only begotten son to save the whole world from their sins.; title: In the seventh century BC, The Prophet Isaiah wrote, ‘Therefore the Lord himself will give you a sign. Behold, the virgin will conceive, and bear a son, and shall call his name Immanuel.’ [Isaiah 7:14]; title: According to Matthew 1:23, the name Immanuel means ‘God is with us.’; title: Then in Isaiah 9:6, the Bible tells us, ‘For to us a child is born. To us a son is given; and the government will be on his shoulders. His name will be called Wonderful, Counselor, Mighty God, Everlasting Father, Prince of Peace.’; title: There was a woman who lived in the town of Nazareth, in the province of Galilee, and her name was Mary.  She was engaged to a man from Bethlehem named Joseph, who was from the family of King David.; title: One day, an angel from the Lord came to her and said, ‘Rejoice, you highly favored one! The Lord is with you. Blessed are you among women!’; title: But Mary was confused. She didn’t understand his message.; title: The angel said to her, ‘Don't be afraid, Mary, for you have found favor with God.; title: Behold, you will conceive in your womb, and bring forth a son, and will call his name Jesus.; title: He will be great, and will be called the Son of the Most High. The Lord God will give him the throne of his father, David, and he will reign over the house of Jacob forever. There will be no end to his Kingdom.’; title: Mary said to the angel, ‘How can this be, seeing I am a virgin?’; title: The angel answered her, ‘The Holy Spirit will come on you, and the power of the Most High will overshadow you. Therefore also the Holy one who is born from you will be called the Son of God.; title: Behold, Elizabeth, your relative, also has conceived a son in her old age; and this is the sixth month with her who was called barren.; title: For everything spoken by God is possible.’; title: Mary said, ‘Behold, the handmaid of the Lord; be it to me according to your word.’ The angel departed from her. [Luke 1:28-38]; title: But when Joseph heard about this, he was confused and didn’t know what to do.  How could she be with a child if they weren’t married yet?; title: Let’s read Matthew 1:19-25:; title: Joseph, her husband, being a righteous man, and not willing to make her a public example, intended to put her away secretly.; title: But when he thought about these things, behold, an angel of the Lord appeared to him in a dream, saying, ‘Joseph, son of David, don't be afraid to take to yourself Mary, your wife, for that which is conceived in her is of the Holy Spirit.; title: She shall bring forth a son. You shall call his name Jesus, for it is he who shall save his people from their sins.’; title: Now all this has happened, that it might be fulfilled which was spoken by the Lord through the prophet, saying,; title: ‘Behold, the virgin shall be with child, and shall bring forth a son. They shall call his name Immanuel;’ which is, being interpreted, ‘God with us.’; title: Joseph arose from his sleep, and did as the angel of the Lord commanded him, and took his wife to himself; and didn't know her sexually until she had brought forth her firstborn son. He named him Jesus.; title: We read in Luke 2:1-7:; title: Now it happened in those days, that a decree went out from Caesar Augustus that all the world should be enrolled.; title: This was the first enrollment made when Quirinius was governor of Syria.; title: All went to enroll themselves, everyone to his own city.; title: Joseph also went up from Galilee, out of the city of Nazareth, into Judea, to the city of David, which is called Bethlehem, because he was of the house and family of David; to enroll himself with Mary, who was pledged to be married to him as wife, being pregnant.; title: It happened, while they were there, that the day had come that she should give birth.; title: She brought forth her firstborn son, and she wrapped him in bands of cloth, and laid him in a feeding trough, because there was no room for them in the inn.; title: So that’s how our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ was born and see how humble he was!; title: I did a research on the exact year of his birth, and there were many ideas about this.  The most accepted times are between 4 and 6 BC.”; title: December the 25th was very good.  Joshua, and John’s girlfriends were back to life.  Even their best friend Samuel was alive now.; title: At first, Joshua thought that his first Christmas in New Jerusalem was the worst, but after Emily was back to life, it became the best Christmas that he had ever celebrated.; title: While he was living with the Bakers, Joshua never got anything for Christmas. The Bakers bought many gifts for Jack, but Joshua was forgotten.; title: On New Year’s Eve, there was a very big party at the restaurant.  So Joshua and Emily sat together again. John and Sarah sat across from them.; title: “Ladies and gentlemen,” said Brother Noah in the microphone, “We’re celebrating the end of the year 2212 and the beginning of 2213. Our great king is here with us today. So let’s welcome his majesty, King Solomon!”; title: As King Solomon was entering the restaurant, Joshua whispered to Emily, “This is the first time that Brother Noah has ever respected King Solomon. I mean, the last time he was here, Brother Noah didn’t say ‘his majesty.’ So what’s new with him?”; title: But before Emily was able to answer his question, Brother Noah came to him and whispered, “The King says that the celebration is not good unless you’re sitting with him.” Then he took both Joshua and Emily to where the king was sitting. Joshua sat on the king’s right and Emily sat beside him as usual.; title: “So where’s Mr. Satan?” Joshua asked the king, laughing.; title: “O he’s here,” smiled King Solomon. “But he’s celebrating with his own people. Maybe he’s afraid of you. Ha-ha-ha!”; title: “What would you like to drink, Joshua?” Brother Noah asked.; title: “Jerusalemite juice, please,” replied Joshua. But the King asked for wine.; title: Now the Jerusalemite wine was different from all the other kinds of wine. It doesn’t make a person drunk. The Bible doesn’t condemn those who drink wine; as long as they don’t get drunk. Therefore, the Lord helped the skillful people of New Jerusalem to make a safe-to-drink wine.  That’s why King Solomon was able to drink it. In New Jerusalem, no one was restricted from drinking that wine. But Joshua didn’t know about this yet.; title: It was now the month of January, of the year 2213.; title: On January the sixth, it was John’s birthday. So Joshua took Emily to go to  buy something for him.; title: They stopped at a store called ‘Friendly To Your Friends.’ It sold birthday cards. Joshua bought a set of cards. Each card showed a man standing at a table, which had a very large piece of cake and many candles on it. The man was holding a Bible.; title: Another kind of cards showed two teenage boys together. They were praying in a church. Both of them were carrying incense in one hand and a candle in the other. But there were Bible verses and words of inspiration written on all the cards.; title: After they had returned to the Holy Community Building, Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah were waiting for them in one of the empty rooms. One of these rooms was used for John’s birthday.; title: After all the guests were there, Brother Abraham did a little prayer. So everyone stood up to pray with him. Then he read a few verses from the Bible.; title: John laughed and said, “You should read Job chapter 3.”; title: “You don’t like your life then?” laughed Samson, his oldest brother. In the third chapter of Job, Job curses the day in which he was born.; title: There was a lot of food that night including steak, all kinds of barbecue, potato, chips and many other foods. There were also many kinds of drinks including many pops. Almost everyone was drinking Pepsi that night.; title: Suddenly, a bottle of Pepsi had appeared out of nowhere. It was mixed with the other ones. However, no one saw it.; title: Then Emily took another bottle to drink. It was the new one that had appeared out of nowhere. However, she didn’t know that it was the new one, because it was mixed with the other ones. But when she drank from it, she started burning. Her whole body was burning. She was also throwing up. She was screaming very loud. So Brother Abraham ordered emergency people, as they were called in New Jerusalem, to take her to the hospital.; title: Emily stayed in the hospital for two days. It was very hard for her to talk, because her throat was still burning.; title: Meanwhile, Brother Noah ordered an investigation to be done about the bottle. He discovered that a Devilist man named Antichrist, was responsible for the trouble. So he was sent to the JFDC, which stands for ‘the jail For Devilist Criminals.’; title: The jail For Devilist Criminals is a place where a Devilist criminal is put in. The Jerusalemite government didn’t want to mix Christian criminals with the Devilists. That’s why they had their own prison.; title: Interestingly, all the Christian prisons were empty. Since most of them are believers, they don’t do anything wrong to be put in prison.; title: On January the ninth, Joshua and John went to their second class, which was called “Soldiers For Christ.” Brother Paul, their teacher, looked very happy that morning.; title: “Good morning boys and girls!” he said.  “Tonight, we’ll be going to one of the Devilist sections to practice our war against evil spirits.  Remember, while you’re there, many terrible things will start happening to you.  So use what you have learned in this class so far to fight them.”; title: After school was over, Joshua and John went to see Emily, who was still recovering. She left the hospital, but she was staying in their section.; title: “How are you feeling, dear?” asked Joshua, sitting on the bed beside her.; title: “Better,” she answered. Her voice wasn’t normal yet.; title: Joshua felt sorry for her. So he put his arms around her and even kissed her. It was very hard for him not talking to her.; title: That evening, Joshua and John were preparing to go to one of the Devilist sections.  They were very scared, because they weren’t sure whether they would survive or not.; title: So they followed the teacher to the door of one of the Devilist sections.  At last, he stopped and said, “Keep your cameras with you, because the Spiritual Soldiers will be a little far from you today.  But as soon as they see you suffering, they’ll run and save you.  As for now, your only job is to enter the section, and just keep going to different rooms.  As soon as you see something unusual, take out your S.W and shout out the name of Jesus.”; title: Next, he gave each one of them a candle, because that particular section was very dark. It was dark both physically and spiritually, because there were many dark forces living there.; title: So they entered the section.  Each person went his own way.; title: Joshua started walking in the main hallway of that section.  He was very afraid that something might happen to him.  So he tried to listen very carefully.; title: There were very scary objects and images.  There were pictures of ghosts, scary animals and monsters.  Then Joshua closed his eyes, because he couldn’t look at these things. They were too scary to look at. Most people who see these images don’t survive. He was lucky to survive, because he had looked at them for a minute.; title: “Help! Help!” shouted a girl.  Joshua started running toward the voice, but he heard a voice say,; title: “Don’t go to her.  It’s very dangerous where she is.  Death will be waiting for you!”; title: But Joshua pointed his S.W at the voice and shouted, “Jesus!”; title: “Please don’t say that name again!” yelled the demon at him, but Joshua ignored him and ran toward the girl.; title: There was a door that he had to open before he would be able to get to that girl.  So he tried to open it in many ways but failed.; title: “You can’t open this door.  I’m holding it.  Opening this door will lead to your death!”; title: “Lord Jesus Christ!” yelled Joshua, and suddenly, the door was opened.  So he entered the room and saw very scary people.  They weren’t humans but they were able to hold that girl.; title: “Don’t come near us!” they said, “Or you’ll follow her!”; title: “Lord Jesus Christ!” Joshua shouted at the demons as he pointed his S.W at them.  Suddenly, they all disappeared and the girl was left dead on the floor.; title: So he went over to her and said, “Don’t worry!  I’m Joshua!” But the girl didn’t move.; title: Then he touched her with his S.W and said, “In Jesus’s name!”  The girl opened her eyes and looked at him.  She was in his SFC class.  Her name was Tierney. She was the one that the Devilists made fun of because she was very short.; title: Then he put his arms around her and said, “Don’t be afraid.  I’m Joshua.  Are you all right?”; title: Slowly, she sat up.  Then she put her arms around him and started crying.  “Thank you!  Thank you!  You saved me!”; title: “It was the Lord Jesus who saved you,” replied Joshua, sounding relieved that she was still alive.  “Come on!  Let’s get out of here!”; title: Chapter 13; title: The Vision; title: As they were leaving, a man ran toward them.  Then they realized that he was the new leader of the Devilist Community of this building. His name was Mr. Molech.; title: “Follow me!” he yelled at them.; title: So they followed him with fear. Were they in trouble?  Finally, he stopped at a door.; title: He pointed at Tierney and said, “You may go.”; title: “No!” she shouted at him.  “I’m willing to die with Joshua! He saved me!”; title: The man smiled nastily and replied, “Well he’s not going to die, silly girl!  Leave at once!!”  And she left.; title: Joshua sat in front of the man. His whole body was shaking with fear. Being in the presence of a Devilist wasn’t fun at all.; title: “So tell me,” began the man. “How many demons have you destroyed?  Why did you destroy them?  You’ll have to pay for this!  You’ve destroyed our best friends!”; title: “Aren’t humans more precious than demons?” asked Joshua.; title: Just then, Brother Noah and Brother Paul had entered the room.; title: “What happened, Joshua?” said Brother Noah in a worried voice.; title: “So you don’t care for our demons?” yelled the man at Brother Noah.  “This boy has destroyed 22 of our best demons!”; title: Brother Noah shouted, “Joshua will not be punished for destroying demons!” Then he got to his feet and said, “Come with me, Joshua!”; title: “He’ll have to pay for this!” yelled the Devilist leader.; title: So Joshua followed Brother Noah and Brother Paul back to the Christian sections.  Then they went to Brother Noah’s office.; title: “I want you to tell me the whole story,” said Brother Noah.; title: Then Joshua told him everything.  He told him about how he had saved Tierney.; title: “You saved my daughter?” asked Brother Paul, hugging Joshua very tightly.  “Thank you!  May the Lord bless you always! Didn’t I tell you that you would be the best soldier?”; title: “So they want to punish you for saving people?” laughed Brother Noah.  “Joshua you’ve done something very good today!  How could anyone punish you for saving Brother Paul’s daughter?”; title: Joshua returned to his section and told his friends everything that had happened. Next, he turned to John and asked, “How did you do?”; title: “Very bad,” snickered John. “I was almost killed by some ugly demons. But the Spiritual Soldiers came to save me just in time.”; title: “So will I have to do the same thing next year?” Emily asked in a worried voice.; title: “Yep!” shouted John excitedly. “And I guarantee you that you won’t survive. They’re very powerful, you know.”; title: The rest of January went very well.  Then, on the first day of February, Brother James, the teacher of Basic Beliefs and Teachings of Christianity, said, “Well after a person opens his or her heart to the Lord, that person must be baptized.  Baptism is an act of immersing people in the water.  This represents our death, burial and resurrection with the Lord Jesus.  Baptism is also a witness that we have decided to dedicate our lives to the Lord.; title: This year, baptism will take place on February the 11th.”; title: Joshua had his hand up.  So he asked, “And where are we going to do it?”; title: “Nice question!” replied Brother James.  “Well there’s a river very close to this building.  After we’re done baptizing, we’ll be going to the church area.  There we’ll have a very big celebration.”; title: “Well I haven’t been baptized yet,” said John.  “Even Emily hasn’t.  So I’m going to get baptized this year!”; title: “And we’ll be doing it together,” Joshua finished his speech for him.; title: After the school was over, Joshua told Emily that he and John were going to be baptized.; title: “Great!” she replied. Her voice was back to normal again. “But I can’t do it yet, because a person must be twelve years or older to get baptized. So my turn is next year.”; title: That night, everyone was called to the church area. They were celebrating the baptism of Jesus by John the baptizer.; title: “Welcome to the church area, everyone!” began Pastor Moses. “Today, we’re celebrating the baptism of our Lord and Saviour, Jesus Christ. He didn’t need to be baptized, but he wanted to show us how humble he was. Let’s read from Matthew chapter three, verses thirteen to the end of the chapter:; title: Then Jesus came from Galilee to the Jordan to John, to be baptized by him.; title: But John would have hindered him, saying, ‘I need to be baptized by you, and you come to me?’; title: But Jesus, answering, said to him, ‘Allow it now, for this is the fitting way for us to fulfill all righteousness.’ Then he allowed him. Jesus, when he was baptized, went up directly from the water: and behold, the heavens were opened to him. He saw the Spirit of God descending as a dove, and coming on him. Behold, a voice out of the heavens said, ‘This is my beloved Son, with whom I am well pleased.’ Jesus was baptized at the age of thirty, because according to the Jewish custom, when a man is about thirty years of age, he is able to become a priest. Our Saviour was baptized at the Jordan River. That’s where our students will be baptized this year!”; title: So they spent the rest of the week talking about baptism. Both Joshua and John were very excited. Emily and Sarah, however, had to wait for the next year, because only grade seven students and higher were allowed to be baptized.; title: On February the tenth, Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah had arrived at the Holy Community to celebrate Joshua’s and John’s baptisms.; title: “We’re here to celebrate your baptism,” said Brother Abraham, shaking Joshua’s hand.  “We’re very excited about it too.”; title: When Sister Sarah saw Joshua, she hugged him very tightly and kissed him.  He almost felt that she was his mother.  So he started crying, saying, “You’re like a mother to me!”; title: She started crying as well.; title: “And you’re like a son to me,” she said.; title: It was now the night of February the tenth.  All those who were going to be baptized the next day were very excited.  Joshua and John were very excited as well. Even Tierney was going to be baptized, because she was the same age that they were.; title: Emily and Sarah, however, had to wait for the next year, because baptism is done only for those who are twelve or over.; title: Joshua was the first to wake up that morning.  So he went to the main room of section 1994.  There was no one there.  So he opened a computer and started to memorize the verse that he would be saying at baptism.  It was taken from Matthew 28:19.  It said, “Go then, and make disciples of all the nations, giving them baptism in the name of the Father and of the Son and of the Holy Spirit.”; title: “Good morning, brother!” said John as he entered the room.  “How are you this morning?”; title: “Very happy,” replied Joshua.; title: Then they went to the restaurant to eat breakfast.  Emily came and sat beside Joshua, as she always liked to do.; title: After breakfast, Brother Abraham took Joshua aside, and whispered to him, “Are you in love with my daughter Emily?”; title: Joshua felt very nervous now.  But he said, “Yes, sir.”; title: “You don’t need to worry,” smiled Brother Abraham.  “It’s great honour for us to give her to you.”; title: “And she loves me too,” said Joshua truthfully.; title: “Great!” shouted Brother Abraham.  Then they went back into the restaurant again.; title: “What did dad want from you?” asked Emily, as Joshua sat back in his chair.; title: Then he explained everything to her.; title: “Wonderful!” she said happily. “So are we going to get married when we’re ready?”; title: “The Lord willing,” replied Joshua.; title: She got closer to him and said, “I really do love you. Yes, I want to marry you.”; title: “I love you too, dear,” he said, crying.; title: Talking about love always made him want to cry, because love is so powerful. It can change your feelings completely.; title: Then they left the building and went to a place where there was water.  It was in a river.; title: “This is the Jordan River,” explained Pastor Moses.  “Just like in the Bible.  Jesus was baptized at the Jordan River.”; title: “So Jesus was baptized in here?” asked John.; title: “Well not here,” laughed Pastor Moses. “But this river has the same name as the one in the Bible.”; title: “Even the Devilists call it ‘The Jordan River?’” asked Samuel, who had just joined in the conversation.; title: “Nope,” answered Pastor Moses. “They call it ‘Blood River.’”; title: After everyone had gathered around him, Pastor Moses began: “So today we’ll be baptizing some of our brothers and sisters in Christ. I hope that you’ll enjoy the celebration.; title: Baptism means that we’ve been crucified, entombed and resurrected with the Lord Jesus Christ. It doesn’t mean that people actually die, but it is just a symbol of Christ’s death on the cross for our sins.; title: Baptism is also a proof that we’ve decided to follow the Lord Jesus Christ. So before we decide to be baptized, we must be living according to the word of God.; title: Now I just want to remind you that baptism does not save you from your sins, but it just means that you’re now a follower of Christ.”; title: Joshua was very nervous.  He didn’t know if he were going to survive being in the water or not.; title: So Pastor Moses began baptizing them one by one.  Some of them looked very happy but others looked nervous.; title: When it was Joshua’s turn to be baptized, he went and stood in front of Pastor Moses.; title: Then Pastor Moses started asking him questions:; title: “Do you believe in the Lord Jesus Christ?”; title: “Yes,” replied Joshua.; title: “Did you open your heart to him?”; title: “Yes,” answered Joshua.; title: Then Pastor Moses took him into a room and said, “The first part of baptism is called ‘Baptism by the blood.’ So you’ll have to change your clothes for this part.  We have special clothes for this occasion. So then, you’ll take one of the bottles that are full of blood and you’ll sprinkle it on your whole body.  This represents the blood of Christ.  It does not save you.  It’s only a representation of the blood of the Lord, which washes away all our sins.”; title: Many people donated the blood. But the baptizers would also add lots of water to it, because they didn’t want to use too much blood. The water looked red just like the blood.; title: The baptizers would also add tomato juice to it, so that there will be more red water.; title: So Joshua took his clothes off and went to the bathtub. Then, Pastor Moses sprinkled the blood on him, because he didn’t know how to do it on his own. His whole body was wet with blood. He also sprinkled the blood on his forehead, eyes and nose.; title: After that, Joshua left the bathtub and put a new set of clothes on, because he was wet with blood. This kind of clothes was used for this event.; title: Pastor Moses took him outside again. Everyone was staring at him.; title: Then Pastor Moses explained, “The second part of baptism is called ‘The Baptism By Water.’ This will wash you from the blood.”; title: Then he shouted, “I baptize you in the name of the Father and the Son and the Holy Spirit.  Amen!” and Joshua was immersed in the water.; title: “Congratulations!” said Pastor Moses as Joshua came out of the water.  “May the Lord Jesus Christ bless you always!”; title: Then Pastor Moses took him to a very hot room and said, “You have to stay here until you’re all dried up. This represents baptism by fire. And that’s the final part of baptism. Congratulations!”; title: After ten minutes, Pastor Moses returned to Joshua, anointed him with oil, and took him outside. Anointing with oil is a representation of becoming a member of God’s family. It also means that he was chosen to serve the Lord his whole life.; title: Then many people were coming to hug him.  Emily ran very fast to him and kissed him.; title: “You’re very special now!” she shouted. “So your responsibility is to serve the Lord your whole life. Congratulations, dear!”; title: Finally, it was John’s turn to be baptized.  He chose to be the last one, because he was very nervous.  Pastor Moses did to him as he had done to Joshua.; title: After he had come out of the water, he was shaking from cold, because it was freezing that day. So Pastor Moses took him into the hot room just like Joshua.; title: So Joshua shook his hand and said, “Well done, brother!”; title: After that, they decided to go  back into the building and to the church area.  Pastor Moses was the organizer of the worship service that day.; title: So they started the worship service with hymns and songs of praise.  Then Pastor Moses gave a very long sermon on baptism.; title: Everybody enjoyed the worship service.  They all said that they felt God’s presence.; title: In the end of the worship service, Joshua asked Pastor Moses, “I’m really enjoying God’s presence here.  So can I stay a little longer please?”; title: He thought that Pastor Moses would not let him stay in the church area after everyone had left.  But Pastor Moses smiled and said, “Anyone is welcomed in God’s house.  You may stay as long as you like.  It’s not my house, but it belongs to the Lord.  So don’t ask me to stay.”; title: He smiled again and continued,  “I would like to share something with you first.  In this area, we have many very small rooms.  People can come into these rooms and enjoy God’s presence.  Sometimes, they say that they see visions in these rooms, because they’re so full of God’s presence.; title: Enjoy!” and he left.; title: Joshua looked around but there was no one left.  So he decided to enter into  one of the small rooms.; title: He opened the door and entered.  There were no lights.  Instead, there were three candles burning.  The only light in the room came from the candles. These candles represented the Father, the Son and the Holy Spirit, who make up the Holy Trinity.; title: There was also a strong smell of incense.  It filled the room.; title: Joshua sat on the floor, because he didn’t want to look important in the house of God.  He thought that Jesus was the head of the Church. That’s why he didn’t sit on a chair.; title: There was also a small table where the candles were burning.  On that table was a writer, a little device that contains books, articles and other types of writing.  When Joshua saw it, he took it and sat on the floor again.; title: He opened the first page, which said: “The book of prayers and hymns for anyone who wants to worship the Lord in the church area.; title: This book contains thousands of prayers and hymns for different situations that you want to pray about. If you want the Lord to answer your prayer, come to one of these rooms and take one of these books and look for your situation.”; title: The next page gave a list of subjects used in this book and where to find prayers or hymns on a particular subject.; title: The subject that most interested Joshua was called “Prayers to receive Heavenly visions.”; title: So he started reading the prayers and the hymns.  But his whole heart and feelings were completely focused on the Lord.  He meant every word that he read.  His heart was filling with an unspeakable joy.; title: Then he started reading with a loud voice. He shouted, “O taste and experience how sweet Jesus is!”; title: Suddenly, he fell asleep.  Few minutes later, however, he woke up to find the whole room full of an indescribable light.  The three candles were still burning, but they couldn’t make that much light.; title: Then he heard a voice say, “Joshua, the Lord has heard your prayer, asking for a Heavenly vision.”; title: Within a second, a man and a woman had appeared in the room.  Their bodies, however, were different from human bodies.  They didn’t touch any physical thing.; title: Then Joshua realized something.; title: Chapter 14; title: The same Miracle Repeated; title: “Mom?  Dad?”; title: “Yes, dear,” they both answered.; title: Then the man smiled and said, “My son, you’ve chosen to follow the Lord Jesus Christ.  That’s the best choice that a person could ever make.”; title: “But where did all this light come from?” asked Joshua, feeling happy and surprised. This was the best time in his whole life.  He was talking to his parents.; title: “I am the light of the world,” replied a voice from nowhere.  “Whoever follows me will not walk in darkness.”; title: Then Joshua realized that it was the Lord who appeared in a form of light.  Therefore, there were three people talking with Joshua, and they were the Lord Jesus, Joseph and Mary, his parents.; title: Then Mary spoke and said, “My son, trust in the Lord and he will help you.  Don’t be afraid of evil.  The Lord Jesus wasn’t afraid of death, that’s how he was able to defeat the devil. So courage brings victory.”; title: Joshua didn’t know what to say or think.  However, he felt very happy that he was hearing the voices of his parents for the first time in his life.  He also heard the voice of Jesus.; title: “Can you tell me anything about when I was only six months old?” he asked interestingly.; title: “Well…” began Joseph. “Brother Noah came to Canada, where I was born. He preached the Good News for me. Therefore, I decided to open my heart to the Lord. Next, he visited your mother and did the same thing. Your mother also opened her heart to the Lord. Then Brother Noah brought us to live in New Jerusalem, and specifically, in the Holy Community Building. So then, your mother and I got married. On August the twenty-ninth, 2200, you were born. Then on March the seventh of the next year, we were murdered. However, we didn’t know what happened to you. The Lord told us that you are alive. That’s why he sent us to speak with you. So tell us, what happened after we left your world?”; title: Joshua told them everything that had happened since they were murdered until this day. He told them about his life with the Bakers.; title: “Well I know that my sister hates me,” said Mary. “But I love her, because our Lord taught us to love; even our enemies.”; title: Then Joshua told them about the Abrahams.; title: “Yes,” said Joseph, “We were like brothers and sisters. Even Brother Benjamin and Sister Bianca were in our group. We know that Brother Benjamin was kidnapped. So is he still in prison?”; title: “Yes he is,” stated Joshua. “But his son, Samuel, is one of my best friends.”; title: “How are the Abrahams?” asked Joseph.; title: “Very good,” smiled Joshua. “They treat me like one of their own children. I’m in love with their daughter, Emily, and she’s in love with me as well.”; title: “I encourage you to marry Emily when you’re old enough,” continued Mary. “We never saw her, because she was born after we left this world.”; title: “So what happened to Beelzebub after he failed to murder you?” asked Joseph thoughtfully.; title: “He lost all his powers,” Joshua told his father. “He’s hiding somewhere, because he’s afraid that someone might arrest him.”; title: “So what’s Heaven like?” asked Joshua, not knowing what to say.; title: “Very beautiful,” replied Joseph.  “But that’s all I can tell you now. You’ll know all about it one day.”; title: “And why can’t you tell me now?” asked Joshua.; title: Joseph and Mary suddenly disappeared.  Joshua looked everywhere but they weren’t found.  However, the light was still there.  Then Joshua realized that Jesus was still there.; title: Joshua looked up and said, “Lord Jesus?”; title: “Yes, my child,” replied the Lord mercifully.  “Many people call me ‘Jesus’ instead of ‘Lord Jesus,’ but you have respected my Holy Name.  Therefore, people will respect your name one day.”; title: Joshua said, “But Lord, I don’t deserve all this.  Why do you care about me so much?”; title: “Because I love you,” replied the Lord.  “I created you in my own image.”; title: “But I’m a sinner,” said Joshua, almost crying because of Jesus’s love for him.; title: “I know you are,” answered the Lord.  “But sin did not come from you.  It came from the devil.  That’s why I decided to redeem you, because I knew that it wasn’t your fault.; title: Secondly, I don’t remember your sins any longer, because they were all washed in my blood.”; title: Joshua was crying very hard now.  He did nothing to earn God’s love.; title: “I’m a sinner!” he shouted.  “I’m unclean!  How could the holiest person in Heaven and on earth die for a person such as me?”; title: The light was gone now.  The only light that remained was that of the candles.; title: However, Joshua still had one more question to ask Jesus. His question was concerning why the Lord had saved him from Beelzebub. Unfortunately, Jesus was gone now.; title: After that, Joshua wiped out his tears and left that room.  He returned back to his section.; title: He told his friends everything that had happened in the church area.  He told them how his parents had appeared to him, and how the light was actually Jesus.; title: “Praise the Lord!” shouted John after Joshua had finished telling them his story.  “Praise Jesus!  Hallelujah!  His love endures forever!”; title: “So what was talking with your parents like?” asked Emily interestingly.; title: Joshua started crying. Then he went and put his arms around her and whispered, “It was the best time in my whole life. They told me to marry you.”; title: The next morning, he was eating breakfast with his friends when Brother Noah came to him and whispered, “I need you to come with me please.  You may also bring your friends if you like.”; title: “Let’s go!” Joshua told John, Emily and Sarah.  “Follow Brother Noah.”; title: So they sat in Brother Noah’s office.  Emily sat with Joshua as usual, and John and Sarah sat together.; title: “Well how are you, everyone?” asked Brother Noah as he sat on his chair.  He had a coffee in front of him as usual.; title: “Good,” they all answered.; title: “Oh do you want to know something?” said Joshua.; title: “Sure!” replied Brother Noah joyfully.; title: Then Joshua told him about the vision that he had the previous day.; title: “Wow!” shouted Brother Noah. “I really missed your parents. They were such a very nice couple.”; title: Then he looked at Joshua and explained, “Well as I told you long time ago, we have decided to bring other Christian denominations to New Jerusalem.  So the Bobs are ready to come.  We have prepared a section for all Catholics in this building.”; title: “But last September you told us that you would start building a section for Catholics,” interupted Joshua. “So how did you complete it in only six months?”; title: “We didn’t need to build anything. “Smiled Brother Noah, who had just ordered another coffee. “We have many empty sections here in the Holy Community Building. So all we had to do was to put some stuff in one of these sections and prepare it for the new group.”; title: Joshua smiled and asked, “How do the Devilists feel now that we’re bringing more Christians to this building?”; title: “Not happy at all,” replied Brother Noah happily. “But we’ve asked the Catholics who are coming here to be on our side and they have agreed. So the Bobs will be arriving at the Holy Community building on the week of March break.”; title: He looked at Joshua and continued, “I was thinking if we could take you with us.  You’ll go to their house first to take them, and then you’ll go to Ottawa to stay with Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah until you come back.”; title: John asked, “Can we come too?  We’ll be staying with our parents, you know.”; title: “Okay,” responded Brother Noah.  “So you’ll be going with Joshua.”; title: “And when are we going to leave for Canada?” asked Joshua.; title: “On March the 15th,” answered Brother Noah.; title: After that, all four of them returned to their section.  Then Joshua went over to Emily and whispered, “I’m not happy that Emily Bob is coming to live here.  She’ll be very sad when she finds out that I’m no longer in love with her.”; title: “It’s not easy,” she replied sadly.  “But we’ll try to make her happy as much as we can.”; title: “Well we won’t be seeing each other a lot anyway,” said Joshua.  “She’ll be in the Catholic section, I suppose.”; title: “Probably,” replied Emily.; title: The next day, Joshua went to his first class, New Jerusalem Studies, and told his teacher about the vision that he had. Mr. Nebu couldn’t believe what he was hearing.; title: “Listen,” he told Joshua. “I want you to tell it to the whole class, but don’t use the name of Jesus.”; title: Joshua agreed. So he went and stood at Mr. Nebu’s desk to speak. Joshua told them everything that had happened in the church area. Most of them looked angry and defeated. This made Joshua to think that they liked Beelzebub.; title: He told his story to all his other classes. All the students found it very interesting.; title: March the fifteenth was here.  Joshua woke up early in the morning to get ready to go to Canada.; title: “John!” he shouted for John to wake up.; title: Then both of them went to the main room of their section.  The room was empty.; title: John said in a sleepy voice, “Do you think that you could visit the Bakers while you’re in Hamilton?”; title: “Hmmm…” thought Joshua.  “Not sure.  They don’t want to see me anyway.  So why should I go and visit them?”; title: “Well…” thought John.  “They’re still your aunt and uncle, after all.”; title: “Do you think that I should forgive them after all the bad things that they’ve done to me?” asked Joshua thoughtfully.; title: “Yes,” replied John.  “God forgave us for all our sins.  So why shouldn’t we forgive others?  We don’t deserve God’s forgiveness, after all. Jesus also taught us to love our enemies.”; title: “Amazing…” replied Joshua, remembering his conversation with Jesus when his parents had appeared to him.; title: ”I guess I’ll forgive them,” he added.; title: Then Emily and Sarah came into the room.  They both looked happy for some reason. They were even all dressed up, ready to travel.; title: “Why are you so happy?” asked John, trying not to sound rude.; title: “Aha!” laughed Emily.  “We’re going to visit the other world.”; title: So they went to the restaurant to eat breakfast.  They would be leaving in two hours.; title: Then, they were on their way back to their section when Sister Bianca had called them.  So they followed her to her office.; title: “I just want to have a quick word with you all,” she said.  “Don’t forget to greet Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah for me.”; title: “Well my parents greet you also,” said Joshua. “They appeared to me on the day that I was baptized.”; title: Sister Bianca started crying.; title: “I really want to see them!”; title: Next, she wiped out her tears and said to John and Emily, “So don’t forget to say hi to your parents for me. Okay?”; title: To make a little joke, Joshua pointed at Sarah, John’s girlfriend and said, “This is Sister Sarah!”; title: “Good one!” laughed John.  “And I’m Brother Abraham!”; title: “That’s even better!” Joshua laughed back.; title: “What about me?” asked Emily sweetly?; title: “Let me think…” replied John, scratching his head.  “Well we’ll let you be ‘Emily the lovely.’”; title: “Certainly!” said Sister Bianca, who was enjoying their jokes.; title: Then they left her office.  But while they were walking in one of the hallways, they heard Brother Noah calling them.  So they turned and followed him to his office.; title: In his office, there was a man who looked about 25 years of age.  He was handsome and tall.  There was a big smile on his face. There was a strong smell of perfume coming from him.; title: “So you’re all going to Canada to bring the Bobs?” asked Brother Noah.; title: “Yes, sir,” they replied.; title: “Wonderful,” smiled Brother Noah, pointing at the young man.  “I would like to introduce you to Brother Daniel, who will be in charge of the flying building.”; title: “Nice to meet you, Brother Joshua!” said Brother Daniel as they shook hands.  “You look exactly like your father.  He was very handsome.  He was even one of my best friends, even though he was five years older than me.”; title: As they were leaving Brother Noah’s office, he smiled at them all and said, “Help Brother Daniel. Okay?”; title: Then they went to the same garage where Joshua had arrived in when he came to the Holy Community.  They even used the same flying building which brought Joshua to New Jerusalem.; title: “But this flying building is too big for us,” stated John. “Can’t we use a smaller one?”; title: “Well Brother Noah told me to use this one,” replied Brother Daniel, opening the doors of the flying building.; title: After they were all in the building, Brother Daniel explained, “We’ll leave the flying building in Ottawa, and we’ll use Brother Abraham’s flying car to get to Hamilton.  It was very kind of him to lend us his car.  Don’t forget to thank him after we’re done using it.”; title: But John pointed at Emily and explained, “Emily and I are his children.  So why should we thank him?”; title: “Don’t you think that children should thank their parents for helping them?” asked Brother Daniel.  “You have to thank your parents too, you know.”; title: Then John whispered to Joshua, “I’ll tell Sarah to say to the Canadian people that she’s my sister.  Then I’ll be doing just like Abraham in the Bible.”; title: “So you’ll be repeating Abraham’s sin?” Joshua whispered back, laughing.; title: Joshua asked John, “Now when I tell people about my vision, they don’t really look surprised. Why is that?”; title: “Miracles are an ordinary thing in New Jerusalem,” Remarked John. “In fact, there are countless books that talk about miracles or visions that people encounter.”; title: “Joshua?” said Brother Daniel.; title: “Yes?” answered Joshua, getting back to his seat beside Emily. He thought that he was in trouble for leaving his seat.; title: “Oh you don’t have to get back to your seat,” said Brother Daniel.  You’re not in trouble for not being in your seat.; title: I just want to ask whether or not you want to visit the Bakers, because Brother Noah told me to ask you. But it’s your choice though.”; title: “We’ll try…” replied Joshua, trying to imagine what the Bakers will do when they see him.; title: Finally, they reached their destination.  Brother Abraham was waiting for them at the flying building garage in Ottawa.; title: “Welcome to Canada!” he shouted as they were coming toward him.  Then he shook Joshua’s hand and said, “Welcome to the land where you lived for 12 years.”; title: “12 miserable years,” Joshua corrected him smilingly.; title: “Right…” answered Brother Abraham.  “But the Bakers are the only relatives that you have left, you know.”; title: Then he took them to his house.  When Sister Sarah saw them, she rushed toward them excitedly.; title: “Welcome, my son-in-law,” she kissed Joshua.  He felt very nervous at that moment, because he was called a “son-in-law.”  But he didn’t mind marrying Emily.  They loved each other, after all. Plus, his parents had instructed him to marry her when they had appeared to him. He had lived without parents all his life. So he didn’t want to disobey them.; title: It was 12 o’clock in the afternoon when they had arrived at Brother Abraham’s house.  So they were resting now.; title: Sister Sarah had brought ice cream, cookies, chips, grapes, bananas, apples and orange for them to eat. Everyone enjoyed their treat.; title: Joshua looked at Brother Abraham and asked, “Don’t you like to live in New Jerusalem?”; title: “Of course I do,” answered Brother Abraham, smiling.; title: “Why did you choose to work at the Jerusalemite embassy, then?” asked Joshua, as he was finishing his last piece of orange.; title: Brother Abraham explained, “I wanted to live here in Canada, because I love sharing the Gospel with non believers.  Most of the people in New Jerusalem are believers, you know.”; title: “But you lived in New Jerusalem before you came to work here?” asked Joshua curiously.; title: “Of course,” replied Brother Abraham, who was enjoying the conversation with Joshua.  “In fact, I was born and brought up in New Jerusalem.  But then I heard about this job, and I decided to take it.  Even my wife liked it.  But we decided to leave our children in New Jerusalem. However, do you remember when I told you that this is our last year in Canada? We’ll be returning to New Jerusalem this September!”; title: About an hour later, after they had eaten lunch, Brother Daniel said, “Are we all ready to go to Hamilton?”; title: “Yes!” shouted Emily happily.; title: So they started preparing to travel to Hamilton.  They would be using Brother Abraham’s flying car.; title: After they were all in the car, Brother Daniel said to Joshua, “So first, we’ll be visiting your aunt and uncle.  If they welcome us, we’ll leave you with them, and we’ll go and get the Bobs.  After we’re ready to travel back to Ottawa, we’ll come and take you.”; title: Joshua didn’t like this plan, but he accepted it without arguing.  He didn’t think that the Bakers would welcome him.  It was impossible.; title: After fifteen minutes of flying, the car finally landed on the grounds of Hamilton.  When people saw it, they were amazed.  How could a car fly?; title: Next, they drove to the Bakers house.; title: “Can I stay with you in the Baker’s house?” Emily asked Joshua.; title: “Certainly!” replied Joshua, sounding pleased.  He was happy because he wouldn’t have to stay with the Bakers alone.; title: Before they had reached the Baker’s house, Brother Daniel said to Joshua, “I just want to tell you that you should not argue with them.  Don’t make them angry.”; title: “No problem,” laughed Joshua.  “But Emily will be staying with me, if you don’t mind.”; title: “O not at all!” answered Brother Daniel.; title: Finally, they stopped near the Baker’s house.  Then Brother Daniel, Joshua and Emily left the car.  They knocked on the door.; title: Mr. Baker opened the door for them.  Brother Daniel explained, “We’re on a mission here in Hamilton.  But we’ve brought Joshua to stay with you a little while.  And his friend Emily will be staying with him as well.”; title: “For how long?” asked Mr. Baker gloomily?; title: “About two hours,” replied Brother Daniel, who had found Mr. Baker to be disrespectful.; title: “Okay,” replied Mr. Baker.” And the short girl will be staying with him?”; title: So he led Joshua and Emily into his ugly looking house.; title: They sat at the kitchen table.  There was no one there to listen to them.  Emily said, “Well I don’t mind living in this world, but not in this house though.”; title: “I agree,” said Joshua, who was used to this house, because he lived here for 12 years – or, twelve miserable years.; title: “And don’t feel sad for being called short,” he added.; title: “Not at all,” she assured him quietly. “Who cares about what these people say about us?”; title: “And who are these people?” came the voice of Jack.; title: Joshua didn’t answer.  He pretended that he wasn’t listening.  But he knew that they heard him talking about them with Emily.; title: Then Jack came into the kitchen.; title: “Is this your friend?” he asked, pointing at Emily.; title: Joshua didn’t want to answer his question, because he thought that he might make fun of her.  So he said, “Happy birthday, Jack!” He said this because it was March the fifteenth, which was Jack’s birthday.; title: “O thank for remembering,” said Jack.  Then he left the room.; title: Next, Mrs. Baker had entered the kitchen.  She looked at Joshua and Emily and asked, “Are you hungry?  Want to eat something?”; title: They both said, “No thanks.” But that was a very big shock to Joshua. She had never asked him if he was hungry.; title: Then she sat in front of them.; title: “Did you hear about the twenty terrorists who were arrested?”  She asked.; title: “No,” replied Joshua, trying to sound happy.  But he didn’t really care about the news of this world, because he lived in New Jerusalem.  Trying to be nice, he asked, “How were they arrested?”; title: “I don’t know,” she replied.  “I only heard that about twenty terrorists were arrested.  They were planning to murder some people, I guess.  But what interests me the most is the fact that they didn’t use any kinds of weapons.”; title: “They’re able to murder people without any weapons?” asked Joshua, sounding astonished.; title: “Well that’s what I heard,” replied Mrs. Baker.; title: Joshua was trying to think who could murder people without using weapons?; title: “The Satanic Soldiers can,” Emily told him. “They can murder people through magic, you know.”; title: Jack came into the kitchen again. He looked victorious.; title: “So are you staying for my birthday?” he pointed at Joshua and Emily.; title: “No,” replied Joshua, trying to sound sad, but he was happy from inside.  “We’ll be leaving in two hours.”; title: About an hour and a half later, Brother Daniel was back.  So as soon as Joshua and Emily heard his voice, they rushed to him.; title: “Ready to leave?” he asked.  Then they said goodbye to the Bakers, but the Bakers ignored them.  So they left.; title: As soon as Joshua got into the car, he became very sad.  His heart was broken.  He almost wanted to cry, but he tried to stop it.  Emily Bob was waiting for him.; title: “Hi, Joshua,” she said.  She could tell from looking at his face that he was sad.  “Are you all right, dear?”; title: He tried to be happy.  So he said, “I’m fine.  Would you like to sit with me?”; title: Emily Abraham was sitting on his right.  So Emily Bob sat on his left. Therefore, he was surrounded by two friends named Emily.; title: Then he looked at Emily Bob and said in a sad voice, “I still love you, but…”; title: “I understand,” she interrupted.  “I know that you have a different girlfriend.  We won’t be seeing each other too much anyway.  So don’t feel sad about it.”; title: “We’ll chat whenever we can,” Joshua assured her. “And thanks for all the help that you gave to me while I was living with the Bakers.”; title: Finally, they reached the Abraham’s house in Ottawa.  They decided to rest for an hour, and then they would be leaving for New Jerusalem.; title: “A flying building?” said Emily Bob after Joshua had finished explaining the flying building to her.; title: “You’ll see,” said Joshua.  He asked the same question when John had told him about the flying building.; title: Brother Abraham came into the room happily and explained loudly, “The Canadian police have arrested about twenty Satanic Soldiers!”; title: “That’s what my aunt told me!” shouted Joshua, remembering when his aunt told him about the twenty terrorists who were arrested. “So were they Satanic Soldiers, then?”; title: “Yes they were!” shouted Brother Abraham.; title: “Didn’t I tell you that they were Satanic Soldiers?” Emily reminded him.; title: At last, they were at the garage of the Holy Community building.  Then Emily Bob went to her Catholic section, and Joshua returned to his section with his three friends.; title: The next week, Joshua and John would be having another practice in one of the Devilist sections.  So Brother Paul started explaining it to them: “This practice will be different from all the previous practices.  This time, I want you to go even further than you’ve ever gone.  There will be more trouble, and it will be even scarier, but you’ll come back safely.  There are certain parts within this section that have more magic and evil things than others do.  But be strong and have faith, and you’ll come back safely.”; title: Then he smiled at Joshua and explained, “And please save my daughter if she’s in danger.” He was referring to when Joshua had saved Tierney from the demons.; title: This news made Joshua and John very scared.  This time, they will have to fight more demons or Satanic powers.; title: So they entered one of the Devilist sections.  Joshua closed his eyes and began to run.  Every time he would reach a door, he would open it and enter.; title: But then he realized that he was very far from the entrance door. So he decided to go back, because he was really scared.; title: Suddenly, he heard a scary voice, which said, “Come… here… you!”; title: Joshua followed the voice until he reached a very scary looking man.  He had a knife in his hand.; title: Suddenly, Joshua remembered the video that Brother Noah had shown him of how his parents were murdered.  Beelzebub, who had murdered his parents, looked exactly like this man.; title: Joshua started shaking with fear.  He wished that he could die, instead of looking at this evil man.; title: “So you’ve come to visit me? Right?” said the man in his scary voice.; title: Finally, Joshua found his voice and asked, “So do you live here?”; title: “No,” replied Beelzebub.  “But I heard that you would be practicing in this section.  So I decided to come and see you. So tell me, how did you defeat me when you were only six months old?”; title: “My God defeated you not I!” yelled Joshua.; title: “Lord Beelzebub is a man now.” Explained Beelzebub.; title: “What do you mean?” asked Joshua, who wasn’t afraid any longer.; title: “Well…” began Beelzebub. “I used to be more than a man. I was a god. But even today, my followers still call me ‘Lord,’ you know.”; title: “How did you lose all your powers?” asked Joshua, but he knew the answer. He just wanted to see what Beelzebub’s response would be.; title: “My powers left me unexpectedly,” replied Beelzebub.; title: “Oh really?” laughed Joshua.; title: “Who let you in?” asked Joshua, who was feeling better now. He was ready to fight Beelzebub.; title: “Of course someone from the Devilist Community,” replied Beelzebub happily.; title: “And who’s that person?” asked Joshua, who was feeling strong by now.; title: “This is not your business, little boy!” shouted Beelzebub, getting his knife ready.; title: “Tell me or I’ll attack you!” Joshua shouted back, getting his S.W ready.; title: “Will you attack the great Beelzebub?” then he got closer to Joshua.; title: “Boom!” he fell to the floor.  His knife fell to the floor as well.; title: Chapter 15; title: The Big Party; title: Joshua was still standing near Beelzebub, who lay almost dead on the floor.  Then about ten men, who were his servants, ran into the room.  They looked scary too.  They carried Beelzebub and ran away.; title: “Come here!” Joshua heard someone calling him.  Therefore, he followed the voice until he could see who it was.  It was Mr. Lucifer.; title: “What happened?” asked Mr. Lucifer as they were leaving the section.; title: “You should know!” shouted Joshua angrily.  “Aren’t you a Devilist?  Didn’t you know that one of your people helped Beelzebub to get into this building?”; title: “Lord Beelzebub in this building?” Mr. Lucifer looked shocked.; title: “Don’t pretend that you know nothing about this matter!” yelled Joshua. “And why do you call him Lord?”; title: “Because it’s very dangerous to call him by his name without saying ‘Lord,’” explained Mr. Lucifer.  “But don’t worry; I’m not on his side.”; title: “Yes you are!” yelled Joshua. “Aren’t you both Devilists?”; title: “Yes we’re both Devilists,” replied Mr. Lucifer, as they were passing the scary objects. “But there are two groups of Devilists: one is good and the other one is evil.”; title: Finally, they reached the entrance door, where Brother Noah and Brother Paul were waiting for them.; title: Brother Paul smiled at Joshua and said, “Didn’t I tell you that you’d come back safely?”; title: “You don’t know what happened?” Joshua asked surprisingly.; title: “Well tell us everything when we get to my office,” replied Brother Noah.; title: After they were all sitting in Brother Noah’s office, Joshua told them everything.; title: “So Beelzebub was in our building?” asked Brother Noah, sounding shocked at the news.  “But how did he enter?”; title: “I don’t know, sir,” replied Joshua. “But I have an idea.  Tell the Devilists that Beelzebub tried to kill me again, but he suddenly fell down to the floor.  And see who will be happy and who will be sad.  Whoever feels sad, then that person is the one who helped Beelzebub to enter into this building.; title: Beelzebub told me that someone from the Devilist Community helped him to enter.  So someone is responsible for this.”; title: So that night, Brother Noah did exactly as Joshua had told him, and the person who looked sad was the new leader of the Devilist Community, Mr. Molech.  Then Brother Noah called Joshua into his office again.; title: Joshua came into the office.  He sat down on a chair and saw Mr. Molech sitting on his left.; title: Brother Noah was very angry.  Then he looked at Mr. Molech and said, “So tell me.  How did you let Beelzebub into our building?”; title: “I don’t know anything about this matter!” Mr. Molech shouted at Brother Noah.  “This evil Joshua is lying to you! And for your information, Lord Beelzebub is still hiding.”; title: “But Christians don’t lie,” Brother Noah reminded him.; title: Joshua could not help it being quiet.  So he said in an angry voice, “Well if you think I’m evil that means Beelzebub is good.  So that proves that you’re on his side! Because we can’t both be evil. One of us is good and the other is evil.”; title: Mr. Molech did not answer, but he looked worried.  Joshua’s words frightened him.; title: “So are you on Beelz…”; title: “Quiet!” yelled Mr. Molech.  “Respect his name!”; title: “Respect his name?” asked Brother Noah, realizing the truth was there.  “So you are on his side!  We don’t need any more proofs!”; title: Brother Noah asked for two cups of coffee: one for himself and the other one for Joshua. But he didn’t ask for one for Mr. Molech.; title: After the coffees had landed on his desk, he asked, “So tell us, how and why did you help Beelzebub to enter our building?”; title: “This is not your business, Uncleanian!” yelled Mr. Molech furiously. “You should not interfere in our business.”; title: This angered Brother Noah a lot. So Mr. Molech was fired just like Mr. Baal.; title: “You’re very wise,” Brother Noah smiled at Joshua after Mr. Molech had left the room.  “With your words of wisdom you forced him to tell us the truth.”; title: “What did he mean when he called you an ’Uncleanian?’” asked Joshua.; title: Brother Noah laughed and told him, “Well, in the Devilist’s view, anyone who wasn’t born here is unclean. That’s why they call us ‘Uncleanians.’ I wasn’t born in this country, you know.”; title: “But I was,” Joshua reminded him.; title: “You’re also considered an Uncleanian person for few reasons.” Brother Noah told him. “Firstly, your ancestors didn’t live here. So you’re still not really clean, according to their beliefs. Second, the religion of Devilism and the state are one. So all those who don’t follow this religion, are considered unclean, because if you forsake either the country or the religion, you’re actually forsaking both of them. Another reason why you’re considered unclean is because you’ve lived more than ten years outside this land.”; title: “What do they call those who were born here but don’t follow Devilism?” inquired Joshua.; title: “They call them Forsakers,’” stated Brother Noah. “Because these people have forsaken Devilism and have followed Christ, they are called by the Devilists ‘Forsakers.’”; title: After that, Joshua returned to section 1994.  He told his friends all that had happened.; title: “Didn’t I tell you?” smiled John.  “Didn’t I tell you that many of the Devilists are followers of Beelzebub?”; title: “Well both Beelzebub and the Devilists worship the same devil,” added Emily. “So there’s no difference between Beelzebub, the Satanic Soldiers and the Devilists. They’re all children of Satan.”; title: “And they even call him ‘Lord,’” added Joshua with laughter.; title: “Oh I’m sorry for misusing his name then!” laughed Emily sweetly.; title: That night, Joshua had a dream that made him think that he could do something to protect the Christian areas from the magicians.; title: The next morning, and while he was eating breakfast at the restaurant, Brother Noah came to him and said, “You’re very smart!” He was talking about Mr. Molech, who was fired last night.  “Your plan and wisdom have worked!”; title: “I have another plan that would protect our areas from the magicians,” said Joshua, getting to his feet and remembering his last dream.; title: “I’m sure that it will work!” said Brother Noah excitedly.  “So what is it?”; title: Joshua moved closer to him and explained, “Well last night, I had a dream of how to protect our areas from the magicians.  So near each of our doors, you must put a small table.  On this table, you must put the following:; title: 1. Three candles and they have to keep burning constantly.  So you must put new ones almost each hour.; title: 2. A writer that has the whole Bible on it.; title: 3. A writer that has the Bible and other Christian writings including prayers and hymns.; title: 4. An S.W.; title: 5. Finally, a cross and in big letters, write the words “Lord Jesus Christ” on it.; title: You must also write the same thing on the other items, except for the candles.”; title: “That’s a great idea!” shouted Brother Noah.  “I never thought about this.  Good job!”  Then he ordered many people to do this work.  Joshua explained everything to them. He also helped them.; title: The next day, which was March the twenty-fourth, Joshua and John were leaving their last class when they met Emily Bob.  She was coming toward them.  She looked happy.; title: “Hi Emily!” said Joshua excitedly before she could say anything.; title: “This is my friend John,” he pointed at John when he said this.; title: “I met him,” she replied excitedly.  “I met him when they came to take us from Hamilton.”; title: “O ya!” shouted Joshua.  “I was with the Bakers.  Now I remember.  So do you want to come with us?”; title: “But am I allowed to come?” she asked thoughtfully.; title: Joshua laughed and said, “Well the Devilists come all the time.  So why can’t Catholics come?  Of course, Catholics are much better than the Devilists, because they’re not dangerous.  Second, no one can stop you from coming to our section, because they all respect me.”; title: So she followed them happily.  Finally, they reached their main room.  Emily Abraham and Sarah weren’t present.  So Joshua decided to sit with Emily Bob.; title: “So who sleeps in this section?” she asked.; title: “All four of us,” replied Joshua.  “I and John sleep in one room and Emily and Sarah sleep in the other one.  In the third room, however, sleep Samson and Isaac, John’s older brothers.”; title: “Want anything to drink, sir and Miss?” asked John, pretending to be in charge of the drinks.; title: “Well I’m tired,” replied Joshua, laughing.  “So anything cold would be good.”; title: A minute later, a tray containing three glasses came into the room.; title: “A flying tray?” asked Emily Bob, who thought that she was dreaming.; title: “Well I felt the same when I first got here,” laughed Joshua.; title: “You brought me wine?” Joshua turned to look at John, who was full of laughter.  “Are you trying to kill me or what?”; title: “Don’t worry brother!” said John, still laughing.  “This wine doesn’t make you drunk.  Plus, you’re a great leader.  So you must drink wine!”; title: “Are you sure that it won’t make me drunk?” asked Joshua, taking the glass closer to his mouth.; title: “Why would I want to hurt you?” replied John, who was also drinking wine. “I would have to hurt myself first, because I’m drinking wine, too. And I started drinking before you.”; title: Then Joshua looked at Emily Bob and said, “Do you see?  Even I still have a lot to learn about this country.  But John was born in this country.  So he knows a lot about it.”; title: Suddenly, the door was opened.  Emily Abraham and Sarah had entered the room.; title: “I’ll be back in one second,” Joshua told Emily Bob.  Then he rushed to his girlfriend and whispered, “Please don’t be angry with me for sitting with her.”  He expected her to be angry, but instead, she smiled and replied, “Don’t worry.  I’m not angry at all.  I have an idea.  You can stay with her whenever she’s in one of   our sections.  I don’t mind that.  You have to be kind to her, because she helped you a lot when you were in Canada.”; title: “You’re the best woman I’ve ever seen!” replied Joshua happily.  Then he went to Emily Bob, who was chatting with Sarah.  So she wasn’t looking at him when he was talking to his girlfriend.; title: “Want to go for a walk?” Joshua asked Emily Bob after she had finished chatting with Sarah.; title: “Sure!” she shouted gladly.; title: “Anyone wants to come with us?” asked Joshua.; title: They all agreed to go.  So they left the room and started walking in the hallway.; title: Then Emily Bob decided to take them to her section.  So they followed her.  Her section number was 9111.; title: “So who sleeps in this section?” asked Sarah, as they entered Emily’s section.; title: “Me and my family,” replied Emily.  “This is my room.”; title: She took them to the second room in that section.  It looked very beautiful and clean.  There were many pictures and statues in it.; title: “What are these?” asked Joshua, pointing at the statues.; title: “These are statues of Mary, Jesus and other saints.” She replied.; title: “And what do you do with them?”  Asked John eagerly.; title: “We use them in our prayers,” she replied.  “They also protect us from every evil.”; title: John wanted to ask, “Do you worship them?” But he didn’t want to hurt her feelings.  But then they all understood why other religions or denominations couldn’t live with the Evangelicals.; title: “So anyway…” said Joshua, trying to change the subject.  “This room is too big for you.”; title: “Well for now it is,” she replied.  “But I want to make it ready for my future husband, you know.”; title: “And who’s that?” asked John, who thought that she was referring to Joshua.; title: “Only God knows,” she replied.; title: “Amen,” said Joshua.; title: “And a woman too,” laughed John. “Why do we always say amen, but we never say a woman?”; title: Next, she took them to the third room in her section. Jeff, her brother was there.; title: As soon as he saw Joshua, Jeff ran to him and shook hands.; title: “Thank you!” he remarked. “Thank you for bringing us to live in God’s country! I wish that people from other churches would be permitted to enter this country! Then Christians from all denominations will live in New Jerusalem.”; title: “The government has given permission to any Christian who wants to come and live in New Jerusalem,” replied Joshua. “But they must be churchgoers.”; title: The next day, which was March the twenty-fifth; Brother Noah called Joshua into his office and declared, “I have good news for you!  The king wants to see you in his palace.”; title: To Joshua, however, this didn’t seem to be good news.  He was afraid.  Why does the king wants to see him?  Was he in trouble?; title: “Why does the king want to see me?” asked Joshua.; title: “I don’t know,” replied Brother Noah.  “But he told me that it’s for some good reasons.  He’s proud of you.”; title: Joshua was feeling better now that he was sure that he’s not in trouble.  If the king was proud of him, then there was nothing to fear.; title: “So who can I take with me?” he asked.; title: “You don’t need to take anyone with you,” replied Brother Noah, smiling.  “The whole building is going.  Even the Catholic people. Only the Devilists won’t.”; title: Joshua felt very happy that the Devilists would not be going with them.  He thought that there would be a party at the palace.; title: “So where is the king’s palace?” asked Joshua.; title: “In Jerusalem City,” replied Brother Noah. “Which is located in the Jerusalem Province.  It will take us about an hour to get there in flying buildings.  And we’ll be leaving tomorrow at ten o’clock in the morning.”; title: So Joshua left Brother Noah’s office and went to his room, where he met his three friends and told them about the next day.; title: “So we’re going to the capital city?” asked John excitedly.; title: “Yep!” replied Joshua, who was feeling very happy to go to see the king of New Jerusalem.  His name was King Solomon.  Joshua had met him when he came to visit the Holy Community on the night of September the seventh.; title: “I can’t wait to get there!” shouted Emily.  “I’ve never been to the capital city before. But the king respects you a lot, Joshua.  So ask him to be kind to us too.”; title: “Only if I want,” he replied, laughing.  “Well he respects everybody, I suppose.”; title: Joshua remembered when he said the name of Jesus and Mr. Satan fell to the floor.  So he kept thinking about that memory.  It was the first miracle that he had ever performed.; title: The next morning, which was March the twenty-sixth, everyone in the Christian and Catholic sections was very excited to visit the capital city and king’s palace.  Most of them had never been to Jerusalem City before.; title: So Joshua and Emily sat together in the flying building.  John and Sarah sat with them in the same room.  Even Samuel Adam and Emily Bob were in the same room.; title: Tierney came and sat on Joshua’s left side. But she didn’t say a word.; title: “Are they in love?” Joshua asked his girlfriend, pointing at Samuel and Emily Bob, who were sitting together.; title: “Not sure,” she replied.  “Maybe she wants to marry him.  Do you remember when she said that she was preparing her room for her future husband?”; title: “Yes,” replied Joshua.  “It does make sense.”; title: “Well there’s nothing wrong with them getting married, you know,” whispered Emily.; title: “Yes there is,” Joshua reminded her.  “She’s a Catholic and he’s an Evangelical.”; title: “You’re right,” She answered, half agreeing and the other half disagreeing.  “But maybe they don’t care about religion.  They’re both Christians, after all.  Isn’t it better for Samuel to marry a Catholic woman than a Devilist one?”; title: “Of course it is,” said Joshua, trying to speak as soft as he could.  “But do Christians marry Devilists?”; title: “Very few,” replied Emily. “But they don’t stay long though.”; title: “So all of the Holy Community is in this flying building?” asked Emily Bob, turning to look at Joshua and Emily, who were still talking about her and Samuel.; title: “Nope,” replied Joshua.  “There are about twenty-five thousand people living in the Holy Community.  So we need twenty-five flying buildings.”; title: “Wow!” replied Emily Bob.  “That’s amazing.”; title: “But how big is the palace to hold all of us?” Joshua asked Emily Abraham.; title: “Very big,  I suppose,” she replied.  “Don’t forget that it’s a king’s palace.  So it has to be very big.”; title: Joshua didn’t want to ignore Tierney, who was still sitting beside him.  So he started talking to her.  She remembered when he saved her from the demons while they were in the Devilist area.  This memory made her cry.  So Joshua hugged her and explained, “It was the Lord who saved you; not I.”; title: He thought that Emily would be angry with him for hugging Tierney, but she told him that hugging a girl doesn’t make her your girlfriend.  So it was okay with her if Joshua would hug other girls.; title: About an hour later, they reached King’s Palace in Jerusalem City.  So they started leaving the flying building.  They were standing in a very big garage, which was even bigger than the one at the Holy Community.  There were other flying buildings there.; title: Joshua and his three friends followed the teachers into the palace.  It was very big.  There were many rooms in it.  It looked very beautiful.; title: The King’s Palace was the biggest building in New Jerusalem and the whole world. There were other buildings that were the same size as this palace, but there was no building that was bigger than this one. It was one million kilometers   in height, one million kilometers in width and one million kilometers in length. So the total area was one thousand quadrillion cubic kilometers. It had about five hundred thousand levels. Just one level was about two thousand times   bigger than all of the seven continents put together. Imagine how big the whole building was.; title: One of these levels was called the ‘King’s Hall.’ This floor contained a huge hall, which was used for important events. It had about a trillion tables: one for every family or a couple.; title: “Welcome everyone!” came the voice of King Solomon.; title: As soon as he saw Joshua, he ran to him and said, “Welcome to Jerusalem City!  I just want to have a quick word with you, if you don’t mind.”; title: “Sure!” replied Joshua, following the king.; title: Then they entered a very nice looking room.  There were two thrones there.  So King Solomon sat on the first one, and he made Joshua sit on the other one beside him. Joshua was very happy to sit on a throne.; title: “Well I’m very proud of what the Lord has done for us through you.” Said the King.  “I’ve been told that Beelzebub was at Holy Community, and he tried to kill you, but he fell to the floor again.  So tell me about it.”; title: Joshua told him exactly what had happened when he was practicing fighting against evil spirits in one of the Devilist sections. He also spoke about when he saved Tierney from the demons.; title: “Praise the Lord!” King Solomon shouted after Joshua had finished telling his story.  “So we’re here today to celebrate the wonderful works of the Lord!  Only few people know that Beelzebub was at the Holy Community and that you defeated him.  So today, I’ll let you speak to all of them and tell them exactly what happened.  Don’t be nervous or anything.  There will be many journalists and reporters.  No one knew anything about it, until Brother Noah told us.”; title: ”Don’t you have cameras everywhere?” asked Joshua, who was surprised to find out that no one knew anything.; title: “Yes…” replied the king with a sad voice.  “But not in the Devilist sections.  They don’t want us to know what goes on there.”; title: Then the king took Joshua and left that room.  They walked to the King’s Hall, which was the biggest hall in New Jerusalem and the world.  There were about seven trillion people in it.; title: As soon as they saw King Solomon and Joshua coming toward the great hall, they all started cheering.; title: Joshua didn’t know whether they were happy for him or the king.; title: Then the king spoke: “Ladies and gentlemen, today is a day of celebration for all of God’s children.  The Lord has sent a saviour to us.”; title: Then he pointed at Joshua and continued, “This man is a gift from the Lord for us.  He’s going to share his miracle with us all today.  Let us welcome into our great Hall, Joshua David!”; title: Chapter 16; title: Preparations For Entry Sunday; title: As Joshua was getting closer to the Official Camera to speak, everyone in the King’s Hall was clapping and cheering. The official camera broadcasts what’s going on in the King’s Palace to the whole world.; title: Before Joshua could say anything, the King said, “From now on, do not call him Joshua, but call him, Mr. David.  He deserves this respect.  Even you, teachers and leaders, you must do the same thing.”; title: Joshua remembered when the Lord had told him that people would respect his name one day.; title: So he spoke to the crowd and told them the whole story.  There was no other voice among the seven trillion people while he was talking.  Everyone was listening with respect. The place sounded empty.; title: After he finished speaking, the whole hall applauded.  Everyone was shouting, “Hallelujah!  Praise the Lord!  The Lord fights our battles for us!  Let the whole world praise his wonderful name!  Amen!”; title: Can you imagine seven trillion people praising the Lord together? How wonderful it would be if you were among them.; title: But that wasn’t all: this party was being broadcasted on most of the Jerusalemite radio and television stations. So almost the whole country [countless people] was watching the big party.; title: Then it was lunchtime.  Joshua sat with the King and some of the most important leaders in the country.; title: There were many important leaders at the King’s Table. They included: the regional leader of Christiania, the provincial leaders of the provinces of Heaven and Jerusalem, and the leaders of the cities of Heaven and Jerusalem. In addition to these leaders, the religious leaders were also present.; title: While they were eating lunch, Joshua said to the King, “Why do they all have to call me ‘mister’?  I don’t deserve all that.  I’m just a human being, just like anyone else.”; title: “You’re very special,” replied King Solomon, putting his glass of wine down.  “The Lord is proving to us that you deserve as much respect as I do.”; title: Governor Matthew Peter, the Provincial leader of Jerusalem, laughed and stated, “Well sir, you don’t get any respect.”; title: “I guess I don’t need people to respect me,” replied King Solomon, laughing too. “I’m just a servant of the Lord.”; title: Unexpectedly, Emily came and sat with Joshua.  The king knew that they were in love.  He was actually the one who called her to sit with Joshua.; title: Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah were there at the party. Brother Noah had invited them.; title: Joshua whispered to Emily, “Don’t call me ‘Mr. David.’  Just call me ‘Joshua’ as usual.  I’m not special or anything.  Give all the glory back to the Lord.”; title: Joshua liked being with the King.  He asked, “So no Devilists at this party, right?; title: “I know,” replied King Solomon, who was very happy that the Devilists weren’t there.  “Isn’t that great?; title: I didn’t ask them to come anyway.  The representative of the Devilists doesn’t like you anymore.”; title: “And what’ve I done to him?”  Asked Joshua, who didn’t care if the Devilists liked him or not.; title: The King laughed and said, “Well do you remember when you said the name of Jesus?  Do you remember what happened to him?”; title: “O that one!” laughed Joshua.  “But how can they be afraid of just a name?”; title: “It’s not just a name,” replied the King seriously.    “The name of Jesus is the most powerful name in all the names.  In fact, salvation is only in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ.; title: Secondly, the devil can’t hear this name, because it hurts him a lot.  So when you use it in front of his followers, something bad happens to them.”; title: “Our God is an awesome God!” shouted Joshua.; title: Suddenly, someone had entered the great hall.  The whole place fell silent.  They were all looking at him.; title: “So you forgot to invite us to your party, right?” said the man, as he was sitting on one of the chairs close to where King Solomon and Joshua were sitting.; title: “Oh hello, Mr. Satan,” said the king with a sad voice.  “So where’ve you been hiding?”; title: “Hiding?” replied Mr. Satan.  “Why would I want to hide in your palace?  I heard that you were celebrating about something.  So I decided to come without invitation.”; title: “So you enjoy going to Christian celebrations?” asked the king, laughing.; title: “Is this a Christian celebration, then?” Mr. Satan asked, shocked at the news.; title: “Yes it is,” replied the king, laughing even harder. “We’re celebrating Joshua’s victory against Beelzebub.”; title: Then King Solomon started chatting with Mr. Satan. Therefore, Joshua turned to Emily and began chatting with her, too.; title: “Can I use the name of Jesus?” he whispered to her, laughing.; title: “Oh please don’t put us in trouble,” she whispered back.; title: “Want to come with me?” said a young woman, coming to Joshua and Emily.  “I just want to chat with you.”; title: “Are you a Christian or a Devilist?” asked Joshua, because he did not like going with the Devilists.; title: “Of course I’m a Christian,” she replied sweetly.  “And an Evangelical, too!”; title: So Joshua and Emily left the King’s table and followed her.; title: Then she pointed at Emily and explained, “Joshua, you’ve chosen the most beautiful woman in the whole world!”; title: “Thanks,” said Emily nervously.; title: So they entered a small, but nice looking room.  There were three chairs and a table. There were also pictures of the king and his family on the wall.; title: Joshua and Emily sat together according to their custom.  The woman sat in front of Emily.  There was a small table between them.; title: “Now,” began the woman. “My name is Princess Dinah.  I’m the daughter of the king.  But you, Joshua, are just as special as I am.  Even Emily is special too, because she’s your best friend.”; title: “Thanks,” said Emily again.; title: “So what would you both like to drink?” she asked kindly.; title: Joshua asked for coffee as usual, and Emily asked for tea.  Within a second, a tray landed on their table.; title: Princess Dinah spoke again: “Well I saw that my father was talking to the Devilist leader.  So I thought that I would talk to you both.”; title: “Do you like the Devilists?” asked Emily, who was enjoying her tea.; title: “Well I like them as the creation of God.” Explained Princess Dinah.  “But I don’t like their thoughts and acts of evil.  They’re full of demons, you know.”; title: “That make sense,” replied Emily.  “We’re supposed to love everyone, because we’re all the creation of God.  But we should hate sin.  Lord Jesus loved everyone including his enemies.”; title: “Aha!” shouted Joshua.  “So you can say Jesus’s name, but you wouldn’t let me say it in front of the Devilist leader!”; title: “Well she was doing the right thing,” replied Princess Dinah.  “Do you remember what happened the last time you said Jesus’s name?”; title: “I know,” answered Joshua, feeling that he had been misunderstood.  “I was only joking.  I wasn’t blaming Emily.”; title: “So anyway…” said Princess Dinah, trying to change the subject.  “What do you think about our world, which   is also your world?”; title: “It’s unbelievable,” said Joshua, smiling.  “I still think that I’m dreaming or something. Living under the roof of the Bakers was like living in a Devilist prison.”; title: “Well it’s not easy to believe,” smiled Emily.  “You were raised up in another world.  So it would be different to you.”; title: About a half an hour later, it was decided that the visitors should go to see the National Church of New Jerusalem.; title: This church was the official church of New Jerusalem, because all the important leaders in the country went to it. It was also used for national-religious days. The most important religious leaders in the country lived in it. You could almost call it the ‘Vatican of New Jerusalem.’ It was the holiest place in this country.; title: This church was the biggest place of worship in the whole world. It was called ‘The Biblical Church Of Jesus Christ,’ which was abbreviated as BCJC. It was as big as the palace. It contained one hundred thousand churches.; title: There were about twenty-five thousand languages recognized by the Jerusalemite government. About half of this building [two hundred and fifty  thousand floors] was given to these languages.  Each of these languages owned ten  levels of the church. Each of these languages took four levels from their area and used them   as churches.; title: The first of these four levels was called ‘The Angelic Church,’ because the voices of the choir sounded like angels. The chanting sounded almost like the Byzantine chant, but the lyrics were Evangelical. Everything was done in a form of chanting, except for the sermon. No musical instruments were used in this place, because according to the Jerusalemite belief, human voice is more sacred than musical instruments.  Therefore, the choir was divided into two groups: one would do the humming and the other one would chant. It sounded as though angels were singing.; title: The second church was called ‘The Hymn Church.’ The choir sang hymns with the traditional instruments, like organ and others. But they also added humming to the instruments. The hymns were like classical music.; title: The third sector was ‘The Contemporary Church.’ This church used modern Christian music in its worship services. So all kinds of instruments were used. However, they didn’t sing Christian rock, because it wasn’t considered appropriate for worship services. Outside the church, however, people were able to listen to Christian rock.; title: Finally, the fourth division was called ‘The Mixed Church.’ The choir of this section sang music of different styles – all Christian lyrics, of course.; title: Each of these quarters had a 24/7 camera to show what was happening in that area all the time. This kind of camera is considered a television station. The choir chants or sings 24/7. So there would be always something to watch on that particular station.; title: Each of these four quarters had a choir that consisted of    one thousand males, one thousand females, one thousand boys and one thousand girls. All the boys and girls were between the ages of ten and eighteen; all males and females were between the ages of eighteen and thirty. However, the chanters of the Angelic Church were not considered a choir, but it was called ‘Angelic Army.’; title: Because there were about four thousand members in each choir, each choir would be divided into sub choirs. So during worship services, only few hundred members sang. Sometimes, each choir would select one hundred boys, one hundred girls, one hundred men and one hundred women and will send them to perform in other places.; title: Whenever a choir would sing, there would always be a camera to record the performance. After that, a new album would be created from that performance. The album would be uploaded to the choir’s website. The album included only songs. So all the pauses and talks were excluded.; title: For a full version of the performance, the video would be saved and uploaded to the choir’s website as well. It included all the songs plus all the pauses in between, and the talks.; title: In New Jerusalem, CD’s and DVD’s didn’t exist, because everything was on the Internet. Even printed material didn’t exist, because everything was on the Internet. Therefore, everything was free. According to the Jerusalemite law and the Bible, God’s gifts are given free of charge. That’s why these choirs put everything on the Internet.; title: The twenty-five thousand   languages that had their own areas in the worship building, took about half of the area of the building. The other half was owned by the Jerusalemite speaking people.; title: ‘Jerusalemite’ is the official language of New Jerusalem. It was spoken by over 99% of the people. But because the people of New Jerusalem were countless, each language had immeasurable number of speakers.; title: As you already know, the people of the Holy Community Building speak English, because most of them were either Canadians or Americans.; title: The church was not far from the King’s Palace. So the people walked to it.; title: When they had entered the main hallway, there were Jerusalemite writings on the walls. So Joshua and his friends didn’t understand them. For this reason, they were lost in the huge hallway.; title: “Who can read Jerusalemite?” asked Joshua in a loud voice.; title: Brother Noah knew how to read, write and speak Jerusalemite. So he helped them to go up to the English floor.; title: “When they had entered the huge angelic church, which was the first English quarter, they saw billions of candles burning. These candles were the only source of light. They represented Jesus as the light of the world. These candles were replaced every hour by new ones.; title: There were also many doors that led to other rooms. These rooms were used to keep the church material safe.; title: Many screens were on the walls. These screens were used for hymn lyrics and Bible verses. So everyone could sing along with the choir and read with the pastor.; title: There were billions of people in that huge church. However, only few of them were seen, because the church was so big. On Saturdays and Sundays, however, the church would be full.; title: A strong smell of incense filled the church. This smell never left this holy place. It was there day and night. So whenever people would go to worship, there would be always ‘holy smell,’ as they called it. The Jerusalemite people believed that if there were many holy things in the house of God, then there must also be a holy smell.; title: The choir was prepared to chant for the visitors for a half an hour. So they all sat together. People sat together according to their community buildings. Therefore, all the people from the Holy Community were all together.; title: The chanting was so enjoyable that it made Joshua think that he was actually in Heaven. He thought that chanting without any musical instruments helped him to feel God’s presence even more, because the chanters were ‘holy instruments,’ in his opinion. Because of that, he decided to go to a church that sang Angelic style of chants from now on. That wasn’t hard, for there was an Angelic church in the Holy Community Building.; title: It was six o’clock in the evening now.  So they were on their way back to the Holy Community building.  This time, however, Joshua sat with Sarah, John’s girlfriend, instead of Emily, because she was talking to someone else in the flying building. John, however, was very busy chatting with Samuel and his friends.; title: “The Festival of the Resurrection is almost here!” Sarah told Joshua excitedly.; title: “What’s that?” he asked interestingly.; title: But then she remembered that he was brought up in a secular house.  Therefore, he didn’t know what the Festival of the Resurrection was.  Thus, she explained, “Each year, we commemorate the death and the resurrection of our Lord.  We honour his death on a Friday and his resurrection on Sunday.  But the whole week is called the ‘Passions Week’ or ‘Holy Week.’  So we do worship services everyday during the Passions Week. We do three worship services per day.”; title: Finally, they were at the Holy Community garage.  So Joshua and Sarah went to section 1994, which belonged to them.; title: “So did you enjoy talking to Sarah?” asked Emily quietly.; title: “Of course I did,” replied Joshua happily.  “She explained what the Festival of the resurrection was, because I didn’t know anything about it.”; title: “You knew nothing about Easter?” said Emily, smiling at him.  “That’s what they call it in the secular world. Right?”; title: “Oh!” shouted Joshua.  “But Easter was all about Easter egg and Easter bunny.”; title: “Well that’s how the secular people celebrate it.” Explained Emily.  “But the true meaning of Easter is the death and the resurrection of our Lord and Saviour, Jesus Christ! The Bible doesn’t say anything about Easter egg and Easter bunny. Some ordinary people added these things to the Festival of the Resurrection.”; title: The rest of March was full of Easter talks.  Only in the Jerusalem Studies class, they didn’t talk about Easter, because there were some Devilists there.; title: This would be Joshua’s first true Easter.  The Jerusalemite people, however, didn’t call it Easter, but The Festival of the Resurrection.; title: “Wonderful!” shouted Emily one day, a week from the Festival of the Resurrection.  “Tomorrow is Entry Sunday, but in the secular world is called Palm Sunday.”; title: “So what’s Entry Sunday all about?”  Asked Joshua curiously.; title: “Oh,” replied Emily gladly.  “We celebrate Jesus’s entry into Jerusalem on a donkey.  Then many people came out to welcome him as their king.  They even spread their clothes on the ground.  Others cut branches from the trees and spread them on the ground, too.  Then, they shouted,; title: ‘Hosanna in the highest!  Hosanna to the Son of David!  Blessed is he who comes in the name of the Lord!’  So they were very happy that day.”; title: Then, Pastor Moses called Joshua and Emily into his office.; title: “Guess what?” he said, pointing at Joshua.  “The names Joshua and Jesus are actually one name in the Hebrew language.  But ‘Jesus’ is the Latin translation of the Hebrew name ‘Joshua.’ It means ‘The Lord saves.’ So your name is actually Jesus!”; title: Joshua looked shocked.  “And my father is Joseph and my mother is Mary.”; title: “Exactly!” replied Pastor Moses happily.  “We’ve been telling you all these months that you’re very special, but you haven’t believed us.  Even your last name is David, and as you know, Jesus came from the family of King David of Israel.  So I’m thinking if we could let you ride a donkey tomorrow, just like Jesus. What do you think, Emily?”; title: “It’s a great idea, sir!” she shouted.; title: “I’m brother not sir,” smiled Pastor Moses. Then he turned his attention back to Joshua.; title: “So what do you think, Joshua?” He asked.  “Emily wants to see you riding a donkey.  You won’t say no to her, will you?”; title: “But I’m not Jesus,” replied Joshua. He was feeling very nervous.; title: “I know…” replied Pastor Moses.  “We’ll let you ride a donkey, but we’ll worship and praise the real Lord Jesus.  What do you think of that? We’ll let Emily sing in the choir.”; title: “For sure!” she replied gladly. “I do sing in the choir sometimes.  But I’m sure that I’ll do it tomorrow!”; title: “Okay,” replied Joshua.  “But will the Devilists be with us?”; title: “Oh…” laughed Pastor Moses.  “They won’t survive with all this worship going on.  But the Catholics will be with us. As you know, the Catholics have their own church. But for this week, we’ve decided to unite. So we’ll be celebrating together. The body of Christ has united!”; title: Joshua realized that Emily Bob would be there.  This made him very happy, because he didn’t see her a lot.  This would be a great opportunity for him to see her.  He thought what will she say when she observes him riding on a donkey?; title: That night, all Christians, including Catholics, were ordered to go to the church area. They didn’t know why.; title: “Good evening, brothers and sisters!” began Pastor Moses. “Tonight, we’ll be celebrating one of the greatest miracles of our Saviour. We’re celebrating the resurrection of Lazarus from the dead! This day is called ‘Lazarus’s Saturday.’ In fact, it is the first day of the Holy Week in the Orthodox Church.”; title: Then Pastor Moses read from John chapter eleven, which talks about the death and resurrection of Lazarus.; title: He explained, “Lazarus was the brother of Mary Magdalene, two of the followers of Jesus. But one day, Lazarus died and was buried. Mary and her sister, Martha were very sad. They believed that if Jesus was there, he could have saved Lazarus from death. After four days, Jesus decided to go and see them. He knew that Lazarus was dead, but he waited for four days before he went to see them. Jesus asked them to take him to where Lazarus was entombed. Then he ordered them to take the stone away from the tomb. But Martha argued, “Lord, by this time there is a bad smell, for he has been dead four days.”; title: But Jesus told her to have faith. Then he prayed to the father. After he had finished praying, he cried with a loud voice, “Lazarus, come out!”; title: So Lazarus came out, bound hand and foot with wrappings, and his face was wrapped around with a cloth. Jesus said to them, “Free him, and let him go.”; title: Jesus didn’t resurrect Lazarus as soon as he had died, because many people wouldn’t believe in this miracle, due to the fact that it is possible for a dead person to come back to life after few hours. So Jesus waited four days and then resurrected Lazarus, because it was impossible for someone who has been dead four days to come back to life. Our Lord wanted to show us that nothing was impossible with him!”; title: So everyone was very happy that night.  They couldn’t wait for the next morning to celebrate Jesus’s Entry into Jerusalem.; title: “So where are we doing it?” Joshua asked Emily while they were eating dinner.; title: “In the Holy Community Square,” she answered.  “It’s very close to here.”; title: “And we don’t need to go to Jerusalem,” said Joshua, laughing.  “Because we’re already in New Jerusalem!”; title: “Good one!” laughed Emily.  “Nice joke. And New Jerusalem is even better than the old one.”; title: While they were eating dinner, Tierney came and sat beside Joshua.  Emily wasn’t jealous of Joshua, since she liked Tierney as well.; title: “You’re a great representation of Jesus!” shouted Tierney at Joshua, because he told her that he would be riding on a donkey the next day.  “You saved me from the demons and tomorrow you’ll be riding on a donkey!  Jesus saved us from the power of the devil and he also rode on a donkey.”; title: So she ran and told her father about this news.  He was Brother Paul, the teacher of the SFC class. This news made him very proud of Joshua.; title: After dinner, they all went back to their section number 1994.  Then they started talking about the next day.; title: “You know what?” said John sadly.  “The same people, who welcomed Jesus into Jerusalem, were the ones who asked later for Jesus to be crucified.  So they were very happy about him when he entered into Jerusalem on a donkey, but they wanted him crucified a week later.”; title: “So will you crucify me a week later, too?” asked Joshua.; title: “But you’re not Jesus, are you?” asked Sarah sweetly.; title: John and Sarah didn’t know that Joshua would be riding a donkey the next day.  So Joshua and Emily explained everything to them.; title: “Good job, brother!” shouted John, shaking hands with Joshua.  “You’ll do great!”; title: “And I’ll be singing in the choir, too!” shouted Sarah sweetly.; title: Chapter 17; title: The Festival Of The Resurrection; title: The next morning, which was April the ninth, everybody was excited for the Entry Sunday celebration.  It would take place in The Holy Community Square, which was part of the same building.  Even the Catholics would be celebrating with Evangelicals.; title: The Holy Community had a television station called “HCB 1234.56.”  On that morning, Pastor Moses appeared on the television.  He looked happy.  Then he spoke:; title: “Brothers and sisters.  Today is the day when our Lord and Saviour Jesus Christ entered into the city of Jerusalem.  Almost the whole city came out to welcome him.  But the most important thing is: have you welcomed him into your life?  So today, we’ll be celebrating this wonderful and holy event in the Holy Community Square.  Someone will be riding a donkey.  I can’t tell you who it is, because I want to make it a surprise for all of you. Even our Catholic brothers and sisters will be celebrating with us. In fact, they’ll be with us the whole week.  Thank you and have a blessed day!”; title: The Devilists weren’t listening when Pastor Moses was speaking, because they could not stand the name of Jesus. They didn’t care about Christian events anyway.; title: Meanwhile, Joshua was feeling nervous but very happy at the same time.  He would be riding a donkey like Jesus.  Many people would be walking around him shouting, “Hosanna to the Son of David!  Blessed is he who comes in the name of the Lord!  Hosanna in the highest!”  Of course, they will not be saying this to him, but to the Lord.  He will only be a representation of Jesus when he entered Jerusalem.; title: Everyone was happy that morning.  They were all dressed up very beautifully. They were wearing their flying clothes on top of their other clothes.; title: “So why are we wearing these clothes?” Joshua asked John while they were changing in their room.; title: “Because we have to fly to the Holy Community Square.” He replied.  “We don’t need any kind of transportation to get there, because the place is very close to here.  So we could use our flying clothes.”; title: That Morning, Brother Noah was dancing while he was walking.  Even Sister Bianca Adam, who looked mostly sad, looked very beautiful.  Joshua didn’t recognize her when he saw her that morning.  He thought that she was one of the grade ten girls, because she looked very young and cute.; title: Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah were also present. Although they stayed in Canada most of the time, yet   they never missed the Entry Sunday celebration. In fact, they never missed any important event.; title: Before they left the building, however, both Emily Abraham and Emily Bob ran to Joshua and hugged him.  But Emily Abraham also kissed him.  Even Sarah came and gave him a very big hug. This was done to encourage him not to feel nervous.; title: Finally, when everyone was ready, they left the building.  Joshua flew beside John.  They looked pleased with themselves. Joshua knew now how to fly on his own.; title: “Here we are!” shouted John, landing beside his mother.  Then Joshua landed beside John.; title: “O hi, Joshua!” shouted Sister Sarah as she hugged and kissed him.  “How are you, dear?”; title: “Thank the Lord…” replied Joshua.; title: As they were walking around the square, Joshua asked John, “Why do all the beautiful women like me?  Why do they always hug and kiss me?”; title: “Maybe you have the gift of hugging and kissing,” laughed John.; title: “Is that one of the gifts of the Holy Spirit?” laughed Joshua.; title: “Don’t know…” replied John sadly.  “I wish that women would like me as much as they like you.”; title: “Well you have Sarah,” answered Joshua, who was feeling sorry for him.; title: “But that’s only one person,” said John in a gloomy voice.; title: “They’ll come one day,” replied Joshua miserably.; title: “Brothers and sisters!” came the voice of Pastor Moses through the microphone.  “Evangelicals and Catholics!  Welcome to the Holy Community Square for the Entry Sunday celebration!  Now, let us all welcome our wonderful choir, the Holy Community choir!”; title: Everybody clapped their hands with a great joy.; title: The Holy Community choir was made up of one thousand boys and one thousand girls.  Both Emily Abraham and Emily Bob, along with Sarah, Samuel and Tierney were part of this choir.  Even Sister Bianca was one of the choir members.  Pastor Moses led the choir that morning.; title: Then Pastor Moses spoke again, “Before we begin our worship service this morning, I would like to introduce you to our representative of Jesus, Joshua David!”; title: The whole place exploded with cheers for Joshua as he sat on the electrical donkey. Then he started moving around the area of the square.   Next, people were bringing clothes and branches from trees and throwing them on the ground.; title: Many people were walking around Joshua, lifting their heads up to Heaven and shouting, “Hosanna to the Lord!  Hosanna to the Son of David!  Blessed is he who comes in the name of the Lord!  Hosanna in the highest!”; title: The donkey that Joshua was riding was not a real one, but it looked exactly like a regular one.  It was an electrical donkey. Joshua used his controller to control it.; title: “Brothers and sisters,” began Pastor Moses. “Let’s read from the Gospel according to Saint Luke, chapter 19, verses 29 to 40.”; title: So everyone started following along with Pastor Moses:; title: It happened, when he drew near to Bethsphage and Bethany, at the mountain that is called Olivet, he sent two of his disciples, saying, “Go your way into the village on the other side, in which, as you enter, you will find a colt tied, whereon no man ever yet sat. Untie it, and bring it. If anyone asks you, 'Why are you untying it?' say to him: 'The Lord needs it.'”; title: Those who were sent went away, and found things just as he had told them.; title: As they were untying the colt, its owners said to them, ‘Why are you untying the colt?’; title: They said, The Lord needs it.’; title: They brought it to Jesus. They threw their cloaks on the colt, and set Jesus on them.; title: As he went, they spread their cloaks in the way.; title: As he was now getting near, at the descent of the Mount of Olives, the whole multitude of the disciples began to rejoice and praise God with a loud voice for all the mighty works which they had seen,; title: saying, “Blessed is the King who comes in the name of the Lord! Peace in heaven, and glory in the highest!”; title: Some of the Pharisees from the multitude said to him, “Teacher, rebuke your disciples!”; title: He answered them, “I tell you that if these were silent, the stones would cry out.”; title: Pastor Moses explained, “The prophet Zechariah, who lived about five hundred years before Christ, foretold about this great event when he said, ‘Rejoice greatly, daughter of Zion! Shout, daughter of Jerusalem! Behold, your King comes to you! He is righteous, and having salvation; lowly, and riding on a donkey, even on a colt, the foal of a donkey.’”; title: And then the people began shouting again.; title: After thirty minutes of shouting and praising, the whole place fell silent as Pastor Moses was about to do a prayer.; title: “O Lord Jesus Christ, we thank you for coming to our world to give up your life for our sins.  We are remembering your entry into Jerusalem before your crucifixion.  All the people of Jerusalem welcomed you with joy into their city.  But we welcome you with joy, songs of praise into our hearts and lives.  We thank you for your love.  Amen!”; title: After the celebration was over, they all returned to the building.  Joshua went with his friends to their section.  Then he and John entered their room to be changed back to their normal clothes.; title: After that, they went to the restaurant to eat lunch.  As soon as Joshua sat at one of the tables in the restaurant, many girls crowded around him.  Then they all started shaking hands with him.  Every time a girl would introduce herself to him, he would introduce John to her, because he knew how lonely John was.; title: “Where are the Devilists?” Joshua asked one of the girls.; title: “They ate early and left,” she answered.  “They thought that we would be talking about the Lord a lot today. So they decided to eat and leave early.”; title: “This is really funny!” laughed Joshua.  “We don’t have anything to hurt them with, yet they’re really afraid of us.”; title: After the girls had left, Brother Noah called Joshua and John to his table.  There were many people sitting there including Brother Abraham and Sister Sarah, Pastor Moses and Sister Bianca.  There was another woman whom Joshua had never seen before.; title: “This is my wife,” smiled Brother Noah, pointing at the unknown woman.; title: So she shook hands with Joshua and said, “Call me Aunt Martha.”; title: The rest of the week was full of worship services.  There were services in the morning, afternoon and in the night.  As usual, Pastor Moses was in charge of the services.  Pastors Paul, James and Peter assisted him. So the church area was full of people for the whole week.; title: The next Thursday, which was April the thirteenth, everyone was preparing to celebrate the Last Supper.; title: “And what’s the Last Supper all about?” Joshua asked John.; title: “Good question,” replied John.  “The Last Supper means that we’ll eat our last supper tonight and we’ll die tomorrow.”; title: “You can’t joke about this!” shouted Emily furiously. “The Last Supper is when Jesus ate his last meal with his disciples before his death.  So we celebrate it each year, because the Lord commanded us to do so.”; title: But then Sarah continued the explanation: “If this is your first time celebrating the Festival of the Resurrection after your baptism, then they’ll wash your feet on this day, because Jesus did the same thing to his disciples.”; title: “Well it is,” replied Joshua nervously. “I was baptized in February.  Remember?”; title: “Me too!” shouted John happily.  “So they’ll wash our feet tonight, right?”; title: “Only if you’re respecting the Holy Days!” replied Emily angrily, still remembering his explanation of the Last Supper.; title: “I was only joking,” he replied seriously.  “Please forgive me.”; title: That night, they all went to the church area.  Pastor Moses was there, too.  So after they were all sitting in their places, he began: “May the grace of our Lord and Saviour, Jesus Christ, be with you all.  Tonight, we are here to remember the last night of our Lord’s life on this earth.  It is a very sad night indeed, but it is a holy sadness.  On this night, however, we also wash the feet of those who are celebrating the Festival of the Resurrection for the first time after baptism.  So in an hour from now, we will be calling up all these people to come with me.  If you are one of them, please come with me, because we will not be calling people’s names.”; title: The worship service began with hymns about Jesus’s death on the cross for our sins.  These hymns touched the heart of everyone who was listening.  Many people started crying, because of the sadness of these hymns.  They were singing about how Jesus died and how much he suffered for our sins.; title: Finally, Pastor Moses stood up to speak again: “The Passover lamb in the Old Testament was a symbol of the Lord Jesus Christ.  Actually, our Saviour died on the same day that the Passover lamb was killed.  The lamb was killed for the sins of the people.  So on the same day, our Saviour was crucified for the sins of the whole world.”; title: Next, it was time for the washing of feet.  So Joshua, John and Samuel followed Pastor Moses to another room.  Then he explained: “The washing of feet will not do anything to you.  It is only a representation of what Jesus did to his Disciples on his last day in this world.  It will not forgive your sins.  You represent the disciples, and I represent the Lord Jesus, who said in John 13:14-17, ‘If then I, the Lord and the Master, have made your feet clean, it is right for you to make one another's feet clean.; title: I have given you an example, so that you may do what I have done to you.; title: Truly, I say to you, A servant is not greater than his lord; and he who is sent is not greater than the one who sent him.; title: If these things are clear to you, happy are you if you do them.’”; title: Then he washed their feet, one by one. He prayed before washing the feet of each one of them.; title: After that, they all returned to the church.; title: Pastor Moses told everyone, “Let’s read from Luke 22:41-44:”; title: “He was withdrawn from them about a stone's throw, and he knelt down and prayed.   ‘Father, if you are willing, remove this cup from me. Nevertheless, not my will, but yours, be done.’; title: An angel from heaven appeared to him, strengthening him. Being in agony he prayed more earnestly. His sweat became like great drops of blood falling down on the ground.”; title: In the church area, there was a very big kitchen where they ate the “Last Supper.” The food was the Passover lamb, which was killed and burned according to the book of Leviticus.  There were cups of “Holy Water,” which were blessed by Pastor Moses.  To bless the food and the water, Pastor Moses used a writer that contained the whole Bible and the S.W.  He also prayed.; title: Before they had began eating, Pastor Moses told them, “Let me read a couple of verses to you from Luke chapter twenty-two, verses nineteen and twenty: “He took bread, and when he had given thanks, he broke it, and gave to them, saying, ‘This is my body which is given for you. Do this in memory of me.’ Likewise, he took the cup after supper, saying, ‘this cup is the new covenant in my blood, which is poured out for you.”; title: That night, they would be sleeping in the church area, because these days were the holiest days in Christianity.  They would be sleeping in the holiest place in that building, which was the church area.; title: “Oh how I love to sleep in this area,” said Emily quietly as they were leaving the church.; title: The church area or Holy Area consisted of three huge churches and countless holy rooms.  These rooms were used for holy things, such as praying, worshiping the Lord and sleeping here during holy days.  Joshua was in one of these rooms when Jesus and his parents had appeared to him.; title: That night, Joshua had a holy dream.  He dreamed that he was standing on a hill.  He saw about six hundred men gathered around a man who was hanging on a cross.  They were making fun of that man.  Then the man said, “Father, forgive them, for they do not know what they are doing.”; title: Three hours later, the man cried with a loud voice, saying, “Eli! Eli! Lama Sabachthani?”  Then the man gave up the spirit.  Suddenly, a thick darkness covered the whole land.  And Joshua woke up.; title: “Good morning, brother,” said John, getting out of bed.  “We’ll be staying in this area today, tomorrow and Sunday.  These days are the holiest days in Christianity.”; title: He didn’t look at Joshua when he said this.  But if he did, he would’ve realized that Joshua was feeling very sad.  He was still thinking about the dream that he had.  He finally realized how much Jesus had loved the whole world that he gave up his life for all our sins.; title: After breakfast, they went to the church again.; title: “Now,” began Pastor Moses. “If anyone of you had a dream relating to this event, please come forward and share it with all of us.”; title: Joshua went to Pastor Moses and said, “I don’t like to speak in the microphone.  So I’ll tell it to you and then you can share it aloud.”; title: “No problem,” replied Pastor Moses.  Then Joshua told him the whole dream and he returned to his seat.; title: So Pastor Moses told the dream in the microphone.  In the end, he said, “Joshua didn’t understand the Aramaic phrase that Jesus said.  So here it is:; title: ‘Eli!  Eli!  Lama Sabachthani?’; title: This phrase means:; title: ‘My God!  My God!  Why have you forsaken me?’; title: When our Saviour was on the cross, God forsook him, because he was carrying the sins of the whole world.  God cannot look at sin.  That’s why Jesus was forsaken.  The Prophet David, who lived about one thousand years before our Lord was born, prophesied about this event in great details.  You can find his prophecy in the twenty second Psalm.”; title: The only light that was in the church came from the candles.  These candles represented Jesus as the light of the world.; title: Suddenly, at twelve o’clock in the afternoon, a thick darkness fell over the whole church area.  The candles stopped burning unexpectedly.; title: “A miracle!” they all shouted.; title: So then, everyone started praying.  Joshua started doing the same thing.  Suddenly, he fell asleep.  The same dream that he had last night occurred to him again. Then he woke up.  He was very sad, because he saw the Lord hung on the cross.  He saw the nails in his hands and feet.; title: So he closed his eyes and cried, saying in a low voice, “Lord, I don’t deserve all this love.  Your only begotten, holy and innocent son died for a sinner such as me.”; title: “Because I love you…” came a voice from nowhere.  “I created you in my image, but sin separated you from me.  Sin also leads to hell.  But because of my love for you, I decided to take your punishment on myself.”; title: So Joshua spent the next three hours crying and praying.  No one spoke to him during this whole time.; title: Then on the third hour, another miracle happened.  The candles were lit in a miraculous way.  No one knew how it happened, but it was certainly a miracle.; title: So they all spent the rest of the day in prayer and hymns.; title: In the other world, this day is known as ‘The Good Friday.’ The Jerusalemite people, however, call it ‘Crucifixion Day.’; title: The next day, which was Saturday, April the fifteenth, everyone returned to the church again.  Nothing unusual happened until six o’clock in the evening.; title: Chapter 18; title: In The Dark Place; title: Suddenly, the whole church was covered with a very deep darkness again.  Few minutes later, however, a great light had appeared in the church.  It covered the whole place.  It was very bright.; title: Then suddenly, a voice said,; title: “I am the resurrection and the life.  I have risen from the dead!”; title: The light and the voice were gone, but the light of the candles was back again.  Suddenly, the whole church was full of voices singing praises to God.  They were shouting,; title: “Christ is risen from the dead!  Truly he’s risen!  Hallelujah!  Praise our Mighty God! Amen! He has overcome sin and death!”; title: The service was over.  So finally, everyone left the church area and returned to their sections.; title: “I felt like I was in Heaven,” said Joshua, feeling sad because he had left the holiest place in the building.  He had many wholly things happening to him including the dream and the miracle in which he was crying to the Lord and the Lord spoke to him.; title: “It was the best time in my life.  If I could live there, I won’t want anything.  Being in God’s presence is more precious than anything else in this life.”; title: “I agree,” replied Emily.; title: The Devilists weren’t at the restaurant that night, because they knew that the people would be talking about the Lord Jesus.  So they were afraid to be at the restaurant while the Christians were there. The resurrection of Jesus was a great defeat for the devil, who was their leader.  That’s why his followers cannot listen to someone talking about it.; title: The Festival of the Resurrection was over now.  It was Joshua’s first time celebrating it. He did celebrate Easter with the Bakers, but that wasn’t the true meaning of that event.; title: On April the twentieth, Joshua went to Brother Noah and said, “I’ve been wanting to ask you for something, but I keep forgetting.”; title: Brother Noah laughed and said, “Well we all forget.  So what is your request?”; title: Joshua looked serious and said, “Where did my parents live?  In what section?”; title: “Nice question,” replied Brother Noah.  “I’ve been wanting to tell you about it, but I forget a lot just like you.  Your parents’ section is yours now.  But you can’t live in it until you’re married.”; title: “And why is that?” asked Joshua thoughtfully.; title: “Because it is located in the family sections,” replied Brother Noah.  “So you don’t have a family yet. But your current section [number 1994,] is a friendsection, where friends sleep together.”; title: “Can I see it though?” asked Joshua curiously.; title: “No problem,” replied Brother Noah happily.  “But I can’t let you own the keys to it.  Nevertheless, you can go to it whenever you want as long as a teacher or someone older is with you.”; title: So they decided to go to see his parents’ section.  Emily went with them as well.; title: “Who lives in it now?” asked Joshua, as they were passing section 8888.; title: “No one,” replied Brother Noah, getting out his controller.  “It belongs to you.  So you can live in it after you get married.”; title: Finally, they stopped at a door.  It had a sign on it that said, “Joseph and Mary David.  Section number 316.”; title: There was also a Bible verse on it that said, “For God so loved the world that he gave his only begotten son; so that whosoever believes in him should not die, but have an eternal life.“ This verse was taken from John 3:16. The funny thing was that the number of this section was also 316.; title: “Here it is!” shouted Brother Noah excitedly, as he pointed his controller at the door and pressed the “open” button.; title: The door slid open and they all got into the section’s hallway.  There were six doors, just like any other section in the building.  Brother Noah opened the first door, which was the dining room, and he let them in.; title: “This is the main room of this section,” he explained. “This is where your parents were murdered.”; title: There were many pictures on the wall.  Some of the people in these pictures were recognizable, but others were unknown to Joshua.  There was also a picture of Mary holding baby Joshua in her arms.; title: “Who’s this man?” asked Joshua, pointing at a picture where Joseph was talking to his friend.; title: “This is Brother Benjamin,” answered Brother Noah sadly.  “He’s the husband of Sister Bianca.  He’s in a Devilist prison now.”; title: “I know all this,” replied Joshua, feeling sorry for Samuel, because he had never seen his father.; title: Another picture showed Sisters Bianca and Sarah standing with Mary, Joshua’s mother.  There was also an image of Brothers Abraham and Benjamin and Joseph sitting together in the community’s restaurant.  They were sitting exactly where Joshua and Emily were sitting these days.; title: Looking at these images made Joshua very sad.  So he started crying.  Even Emily and Brother Noah were crying, too.; title: Joshua was crying for his parents, because he was only six months when the evil Beelzebub murdered them.  He was also crying for Sister Bianca and her son Samuel, because Brother Benjamin was in prison for no reason.; title: After a little while, Brother Noah looked at Joshua and said, “Keep on loving Emily, because her parents were like brothers and sisters to your parents.  You must also respect the rest of the people within Brother Abraham’s house.”; title: “I do,” replied Joshua.  “I decided to love them on the first day that I met them.”; title: Then Brother Noah looked at Emily and said, “You have chosen the right person, because your parents and his parents were like one family.  So treat him like your brother.”; title: “I do, sir,” she replied.; title: Joshua said, “We live in the best country in the whole world, yet we’re not able to free our prisoners.; title: “Right…” Brother Noah commented. “As long as the devil is around, then the problems are also around.”; title: At last, they left that section.  Joshua and Emily returned to John and Sarah and told them everything that they had seen.; title: “I know that it’s very hard,” said John, feeling sorry for Joshua.  “But my house loves you like one of us.  Mom and dad were saying this when you arrived at our house in Ottawa.”; title: “I understand how much you love me,” replied Joshua, feeling a little happier.  “And I really appreciate and thank you for all that you’ve done for me.  I trust you all one hundred percent.”; title: The next day, which was April the twenty first, Brother Noah called Joshua into his office again.; title: “I just need to have a little conversation with you.” He said as Joshua sat in front of him.  Then he ordered that two coffees should be brought in, one for him and the other one for Joshua.; title: Then he began:; title: “Well as you know, we go back to visit our countries every summer.  Very few people stay here in this building.  So I spoke with Brother Abraham, and we have decided that you should go back to the Bakers for a week.  Then the Abrahams will take you to stay with them for the rest of the summer.”; title: “But why can’t I stay in New Jerusalem?” asked Joshua gloomily.  “I’ll go stay in another building.”; title: “It’s a good idea…” replied Brother Noah doubtfully.  “But it’s better for you to go back to Canada, because many of us will be there.  The Satanic Soldiers won’t be able to find you. So you’ll be safe with the Bakers.  Also, there are some liars here.  They say that they’re on our side, but they’re helping the Satanic Soldiers.  I’m sure that you still remember Mr. Baal and Mr. Molech.”; title: “Right,” replied Joshua.  Then he went back to his section.; title: “So you’ll have to go to stay with the Bakers?” asked Emily sadly.; title: “Only for one week,” replied Joshua.; title: The next day, was the “Conversion Day.” All the Christians celebrated this day on April the twenty second of each year. It commemorated the day when almost the whole country decided to follow Christ.; title: The Devilists, however, didn’t celebrate it, because they are not happy that the whole country had decided to become Christians.  New Jerusalem was a Devilist country before most of its people decided to open their hearts to the Lord. It was called the country of Usa. After most of its people had become Christians, however, it became known as New Jerusalem.; title: So that night, there was a banquet at the restaurant.  All the Christians, including the Catholics, were very joyful on this “Blessed Day,” as they called it.; title: Joshua sat at a big table with his friends.  They included both Emily Abraham and Emily Bob, along with John and Sarah, Samuel and Tierney.; title: “Happy ‘Conversion Day,’ everyone!” Brother Moses shouted in the microphone. So everyone became silent to pay attention to him.; title: “On this day in 2060, a miracle happened that stopped all the magical powers. Suddenly, a voice spoke to everyone. It was the Lord Jesus. He told them that if they would not repent, the whole country would be destroyed in forty days.   Then the whole country was full of an unspeakable light.  The Lord Jesus Christ appeared to everyone and told him or her to repent. Their sins were like those of the people of Nineveh. Therefore, the best Bible passage for this day is Jonah chapter three.” So everyone opened their Bibles to Jonah chapter three, which reads:; title: “The word of Yahweh came to Jonah the second time, saying, ‘Arise, go to Nineveh, that great city, and preach to it the message that I give you’.; title: So Jonah arose, and went to Nineveh, according to the word of Yahweh. Now Nineveh was an exceedingly great city, three days' journey across.; title: Jonah began to enter into the city a day's journey, and he cried out, and said, ‘In forty days, Nineveh will be overthrown!’; title: The people of Nineveh believed God; and they proclaimed a fast, and put on sackcloth, from the greatest of them even to the least of them.; title: The news reached the King of Nineveh, and he arose from his throne, and took off his royal robe, covered himself with sackcloth, and sat in ashes.; title: He made a proclamation and published through Nineveh by the decree of the king and his nobles, saying, ‘Let neither man nor animal, herd nor flock, taste anything; let them not feed, nor drink water; but let them be covered with sackcloth, both man and animal, and let them cry mightily to God. Yes, let them turn everyone from his evil way, and from the violence that is in his hands. Who knows whether God will not turn and relent, and turn away from his fierce anger, so that we might not perish?’; title: God saw their works that they turned from their evil way. God relented of the disaster which he said he would do to them, and he didn't do it.”; title: So Pastor Moses said, “After the people of this country heard God’s message, they repented of their sins. Some of them, however, didn’t listen to the voice of the Lord.  They are known today as the Devilists. Plus, there’s still a whole province that hasn’t repented to this day.”; title: The rest of April and May were enjoyable. Nothing special or unusual occurred.; title: In June, however, they had to prepare for the exams.  They would be taking place from June the twelfth to the twentieth.; title: But before the exams, there was another celebration. It took place on June the fourth. The people were celebrating the day of Pentecost.; title: So that night, all Catholics and Evangelicals went to the church area for the celebration. Then Pastor Moses explained,”Welcome to the celebration of the day of Pentecost, everyone! Fifty days after the resurrection of the Lord Jesus, he sent the Holy Spirit to all those who had believed in him. Let’s read from the book of Acts, chapter 2, verses one to four. ‘And when the day of Pentecost was come, they were all together in one place. And suddenly there came from heaven a sound like the rushing of a violent wind that filled the house that they were in.  And they saw tongues, like flames of fire, coming to rest on every one of them.  And they were all full of the Holy Spirit, and were talking in different languages, as the Spirit gave them power.’; title: So the Holy Spirit was sent to all the believers to help them to live according to the word of God. It was also sent to help them with their preaching mission. From that day forward, anyone who comes to Christ is given the Holy Spirit.”; title: Suddenly, a fire appeared on the table where Pastor Moses was standing. So he started to light many candles with it.; title: “This is the holy fire of God!” he shouted. “Hallelujah!”; title: But then, another miracle happened. Brother Paul stood up and shouted, “Listen, everyone! Thus says the Lord: ‘Beelzebub shall regain back all his powers very soon. Then he shall murder many of my people!’”; title: Everyone was thinking about that prophecy. When will Beelzebub regain back all his powers?; title: On June the twelfth, the exams had begun. Joshua and his three friends finished their exams on June the fifteenth.; title: On June the sixteenth of the same year, Joshua had a very scary dream.  He saw some of the Satanic Soldiers sitting together, having a conversation.  They were saying, “We’ll kill Benjamin on August the twenty-ninth.”; title: As soon as Joshua woke up that morning, he called, “John?”; title: John woke up as fast as he could, because he knew that Joshua had something very important to tell him.; title: Then Joshua looked at him and said, “Can you promise me that you won’t tell anyone what I’m about to do?  Even if you try to make me change my mind, please don’t tell anyone what I’m going to tell you right now.”; title: So he told John the whole dream and in the end he said, “I am going to save Brother Benjamin.”; title: “But you’ll have to die.” Said John quietly.; title: “I know,” replied Joshua gloomily. “But it doesn’t matter what happens to me. My goal is to save him.”; title: “Can I come with you, too?” asked John nervously.; title: “Do you want to die, too?” answered Joshua.; title: “I don’t care for my life now.  I want to save an innocent man.  I want to bring joy to his family. The Lord Jesus Christ said, ‘Whoever saves his life will lose it, but whoever loses his life for me will win it.’  So we’re giving up our lives to save one of the followers of the Lord.  That’s a wonderful thing to do.”; title: “I want to do the same thing,” whispered Joshua.  “But don’t tell anyone what we’re about to do.”; title: “How are we going to find the prison though?” asked John seriously.; title: “I have an idea,” replied Joshua.  “Mr. Lucifer told me that he’d do anything that I would ask him for.  He might know something about their place.”; title: So Joshua went to Mr. Lucifer that morning.; title: “Welcome to my office, Mr. David!” shouted Mr. Lucifer as Joshua entered his office.; title: So Joshua told him everything that he wanted to do.; title: “I’ll see what I can do for you,” answered Mr. Lucifer.  Then he left his office, leaving Joshua still sitting there alone.; title: About five minutes later, he returned with an evil smile on his face.; title: “Do you want to go now?” he asked happily. “Are you sure that you want to die?”; title: “I don’t really care for my life,” replied Joshua.  “I’m just taking one person with me.”; title: Joshua brought John into Mr. Lucifer’s office.  Then Mr. Lucifer led them to the garage where his flying car was parked.; title: Joshua and John sat together in the car.  They were very nervous and afraid.  But they were determined to give their lives to save Brother Benjamin.; title: There were no windows in the car.  So they didn’t know where they were going.; title: “Are you sure that you’re taking us to the right place?” Joshua asked Mr. Lucifer.; title: “Of course I am!” he replied angrily.; title: About an hour later, they reached their destination.; title: “Get out of the car!” yelled Mr. Lucifer at them.  “I’m a Satanic Soldier!  I didn’t like anyone of you.  That’s why I was very happy to bring you here to kill you!”; title: Then Joshua realized that Mr. Lucifer did hate him.  But every time he would see Joshua, he would be very happy.  But now he has revealed his true identity.; title: So they ran out of the car as soon as possible.  They didn’t know where they were.  The place where they were standing was very dark.; title: “What are we going to do?” cried John in fear.”; title: “We’re trapped!” yelled Joshua angrily.  “He has tricked us!”; title: “We might even die here without saving Brother Benjamin!” yelled John furiously.; title: “No!” replied Joshua angrily.  “We have to save him!”; title: Suddenly, some scary voices were coming toward them.  They were laughing in a very frightening and cold way.  As soon as Joshua and John heard them coming toward them, they both fell to the ground.  They were shaking very hard with fear.; title: The voices were getting nearer and nearer.  They sounded half humans and half demons.; title: “Where are they hiding?”  Asked one of them.; title: “Somewhere around here…” replied another one.; title: “Come out at once!” shouted one of them.  “We’ll find you no matter what!”; title: Both Joshua and John decided to close their eyes, because they knew how frightening these people were.; title: Suddenly, one of the men did something and light came.; title: “Here they are!” they all yelled with one voice.; title: Joshua and John exploded with fear.  They knew that they could call upon the Lord to deliver them, but they knew that their job was to die and free Brother  Benjamin.  So they were in the hands of the Satanic Soldiers now.; title: Then both Joshua and John were put in boxes, which looked like tombs.  So they didn’t know where they were going to be taken to.; title: “But what’ve if they’re not the right people?” asked one of the men as they were carrying Joshua and John in two boxes.; title: “It doesn’t matter!” shouted another. “We should kill anyone who comes near to us.  These people came to us on their own.  So it’s our job to kill them!”; title: Then both Joshua and John were taken out from their boxes.  The place where they were standing was covered with thick darkness.  They could only hear the scary people laughing coldly.; title: “So what should we do with them?” asked one of the men.”; title: “Nothing,” replied another.  “We’ll have to wait for Lord Beelzebub to come and do his job.  His job is to get rid of the David boy, and then we’ll do the same thing with his friend.”; title: “But why can’t we kill them on our own?” asked another scary voice.; title: “Well…” answered his friend. “Lord Beelzebub doesn’t want people to think that the David boy has defeated him. So he wants to kill him on his own.”; title: Joshua knew that they were talking about him and John, because they mentioned “The David boy and his friend.”; title: Then one of them came to Joshua and John and asked, “You don’t have your spiritual tools with you today.  Did you forget them? Well now it’s much easier for us to do anything with you, isn’t it?”; title: But Joshua and John didn’t answer.  They were filled with fear, but they were still determined to give up their lives for Brother Benjamin.  They kept thinking of the Bible verse, which says, “Whoever gives up his life for me will surely win it back.”; title: Of course, they were giving their lives to save one of the followers of the Lord Jesus Christ. It also didn’t matter to them whether they would be rescued from death or not. Their main goal was to free Brother Benjamin.; title: Suddenly, a man ran into the room and shouted,; title: “The Adam man has escaped!”; title: Chapter 19; title: Conclusion; title: “How?” asked another scary voice.; title: The man replied with trembling, “I was there, when suddenly, the room shook. Then I opened the door but he wasn’t there!”; title: “Lord Beelzebub will punish us now!” yelled one of the men. “He’ll think that one of us has done it!”; title: At that moment, Joshua and John realized that the Lord had saved Brother Benjamin; because there was no way that, he could run away.; title: Therefore, they both started praising the Lord, saying, “We thank you O Lord for saving your servant from the hands of devil worshipers. Now we are ready to die.”; title: “Maybe these boys did something,” said one of the Satanic Soldiers, as Joshua and John were praising the Lord for saving Brother Benjamin.; title: “What do you mean?” asked another.; title: “Well…” he replied, not knowing what to say. “Well maybe they prayed to their God and he saved the Adam man.”; title: Therefore, one of the Satanic Soldiers ran to Joshua and John and shouted,; title: “Tell me what you have done!”; title: However, they did not answer.; title: “Tell me or I’ll kill you right now!” He took two knives and pointed them at both of them.; title: “Take it easy,” laughed Joshua. “You can’t kill us.”; title: “And why can’t I?” asked the man seriously. “Am I not a Satanic Soldier?”; title: Joshua replied, “Beelzebub will punish you, because it’s his job to kill us not yours!”; title: Then he went closer to them and whispered, “You’ve saved my life! So I’m going to save yours too!” However, he ran away, not thinking about them. Then he left.; title: After that, about ten men entered the room.; title: “It is time for you to get some sufferings,” They laughed nastily.; title: So they started hitting Joshua and John with their sticks. The situation was unbearable. They were screaming very loudly. However, they still did not ask for help from the Lord.; title: “If you deny your Lord,” they said, “We’ll leave you alone.”; title: “Whether we live or die, we belong to the Lord always!” Joshua and John shouted. “We’re ready to die for the Lord’s sake!”; title: “Haha!” laughed one of the Satanic Soldiers. “These boys are crazy. They want to die for their God who can’t even save them from us!”; title: “Right!” laughed the other men.; title: Finally, they decided to stop hitting them because they did not want to kill them, since it was Beelzebub’s job to do it. However, they took them and threw them in a very cold place. Then they started pouring cold water on them. So the suffering was very difficult to bear.; title: After that, the Satanic Soldiers sat together and had a little conversation to make sure that Beelzebub would be coming tomorrow to kill Joshua, and then they would be killing John. They were discussing his arrival all night long. It was very important for them to make sure that they had the right people to kill before calling Beelzebub, because he did not want to leave his hiding place unless it is for a very important reason. He could not leave his place, because he was afraid that somebody might find him.; title: At last, everyone went to sleep. Joshua and John, however, were left in the cold. It was freezing. It felt like living in the freezer and even ten times worse.; title: Suddenly, a very bright light appeared there. Then, a very bright and shining man appeared out of nowhere.; title: “Get up quickly!” The man said. “I am sent from the Lord to deliver you!”; title: So they both got up very quickly and followed him with their dirty clothes on. It was twelve in the night when this man had appeared to them.; title: Then the man pulled them by their hair and they flew.; title: He told them, “The Lord saw how much you were determined to give up your lives and save an innocent man. You were also representing Lord Jesus Christ when he gave up his life to save the whole world from their sins. Therefore, the Lord decided to free Brother Benjamin and save you, because of your love and sacrifice. Sacrifice brings liberty.”; title: “But how did Brother Benjamin escape?” asked Joshua anxiously.; title: The angel explained, “About two hours ago, the Lord sent me to free Brother Benjamin. The Lord did a miracle that opened one of the doors of the prison. Then I took him to the Holy Community Building.”; title: At last, they were standing on the ground again. The angel suddenly disappeared.; title: “Where are we?” asked John nervously.; title: There was no light where they were standing. But then John touched a wall. There were buttons on it. So he pressed one of them, and some light appeared.; title: “We’re at the door of the Holy Community building!” Shouted John excitedly. Then he pressed the notification button, which notifies the office that someone is standing at the main door of the Holy Community building.; title: Then they heard someone from inside the building coming toward them. Someone was coming to open the door for them.; title: “Hallelujah!” shouted Brother Noah as he opened the door for them. “Praise the Lord!”; title: Then he hugged both of them and led them to his office.; title: “We thought that you’d be dead for sure!” he said as Joshua and John sat together in his office. “Well I know how tired you are. So I’m going to let you sleep in a special section.”; title: “And why’s that?” asked Joshua, breathing hard.; title: Brother Noah smiled and replied, “Well I don’t want anyone to know that you’re back. I want to make it a surprise for them. So tomorrow morning, I’ll gather everyone at the restaurant and then I’ll give a short speech. After I’m done speaking, you’ll enter the restaurant. And in case you don’t know, Brother Benjamin is here!”; title: So that night, Joshua and John slept in a special section. They were very tired. So they didn’t say anything.; title: That night, Joshua had a dream that wasn’t hard to understand. He saw the Satanic Soldiers at the prison where he and John were. They were saying, “How did they run away?”; title: Another one answered, “Probably their God did something to save them.”; title: “Don’t say that to Lord Beelzebub!” shouted another man. “He’ll be very angry with us!”; title: Suddenly, Beelzebub entered the room. All the men fell on the floor.; title: “Did you let them run away?” Beelzebub asked in his nasty voice. He knew that Joshua and John had escaped, because the men looked frightened.; title: Then he took out his knife and started killing those Satanic Soldiers one by one.; title: And Joshua woke up.; title: “John?” he called in his sleepy voice.; title: “Another dream?” said John as he opened his eyes. “Are we going there again?”; title: “Oh don’t worry,” laughed Joshua. Then he told him the whole dream.; title: “So they’re all dead now?” John asked, shocked.; title: “Yep,” replied Joshua.; title: That morning, everyone was sad, because according to their thoughts, Joshua and John were dead now. Emily and Sarah kept their heads down. Samuel, however, looked happy, but he kept his head down, too.; title: While they were all eating breakfast at the restaurant that morning, Brother Noah came into the restaurant with a very big smile on his face. Everyone stopped what they were doing and turned to look at him.; title: “Good morning ladies and gentlemen!” he said in the microphone. “Our men are truly the soldiers of Christ. They give up their lives to save us, just like Christ.”; title: He paused for a second and whispered something to Pastor Moses. Then he continued,; title: “I’ve got a present for all of you this morning.”; title: Suddenly, Joshua and John entered the room, smiling. The whole restaurant was filled with praises.; title: Then, Sister Bianca and her delivered husband, Brother Benjamin, ran to them and hugged them. Sister Bianca began to cry.; title: “Thank you very much. You were ready to die and save him.”; title: Then Brother Benjamin hugged both Joshua and John.; title: “I don’t deserve what you’ve done for me. I don’t know how to thank you. I will never forget your sacrifice. You’ve never met me, yet you were ready to die and save me.”; title: Brother Benjamin and Sister Bianca went back to their table. Then, Brother Noah gave the microphone to Joshua and told him to tell the whole story.; title: After he finished talking, everyone applauded for him.; title: Brother Noah told the crowd, “Well Mr. Lucifer has not showed up since yesterday morning. So I guess that he has ran away. We won’t let him return anyway.”; title: Joshua and John went and sat at one of the tables, where Emily and Sarah were sitting.; title: As soon as Emily saw Joshua, she hugged him very tightly and said, “You’re back, O my love!” She didn’t know what to say, because she was overflowing with joy when she saw him.; title: Then she turned to her brother, John, and hugged him.; title: Sarah went over to Joshua and gave him a very big hug. She started crying.; title: At last, they left the restaurant and went to their section. Samson and Isaac were waiting for them. They were Emily’s and John’s older brothers.; title: “Welcome back!” shouted Samson as they entered the main room. “Welcome back, Joshua and John!”; title: The next day, Joshua and his three friends decided to go see Sister Bianca. But when they entered the office, they saw Brother Benjamin instead of Sister Bianca.; title: “Hi, brothers and sisters!” he shouted as he walked to them. “Come in!”; title: So they all sat together. Brother Benjamin was sitting in front of Joshua. He was very happy to be free.; title: Sister Bianca came into the office with Samuel. As soon as she saw them, she rushed to Joshua and John.; title: She said to Joshua, “The love of your parents is still alive. It lives in you. I knew that you were very kind person, but I never expected you to give up your life for my husband.”; title: Joshua smiled at her and replied, “Well the Lord Jesus Christ gave up his life to save us from all our sins. So his love lives within our hearts.”; title: Suddenly, Brother Noah and Pastor Moses entered the room.; title: “Well…” Brother Noah began. “I would like to have a little meeting with Joshua and his friends. I’m also inviting some of the important people that know Joshua.”; title: “But please don’t invite any Devilist,” said Joshua.; title: “Oh don’t worry,” smiled Brother Moses. “Many of them are not happy anyway. So could you all proceed to my office, please?”; title: Everyone followed him to his office. The group included: Joshua and his three friends, the Adams and Pastor Moses.; title: After they were all seated, four men plus a woman and girl entered the office. They were: Mr. Nebu, who was the teacher of Jerusalem Studies, Brother Paul, who taught SFC, Brother James of BBTC class, and finally, Brother Peter of Sermons. These were all Joshua and John’s teachers. The woman was Brother Paul’s wife, and the girl was Tierney.; title: Brother Paul introduced his wife to Joshua and explained, “This is my wife, Sister Lydia.”; title: Then Sister Lydia went over to Joshua. She hugged and kissed him saying, “You saved my daughter from the demons and now you saved Brother Benjamin from the Satanic Soldiers! You’re a true savior!”; title: Then Brother Noah looked at Brother Benjamin and asked, “Can you please tell us your testimony?”; title: Brother Benjamin began:; title: “On July the twenty-ninth, 2200, I was in one of the rooms of section 5872, when about seven men had entered the place. They shut my mouth and took me out of the section from another door. Then they put me in a flying car and drove away.; title: Finally, we reached a very dark place. So they put me in a very dark room.; title: One of them told me, “We are Satanic Soldiers. You cannot leave this prison until someone gives up his life for you.”; title: They didn’t give me too much food or drink.; title: Sometimes, they would give me drugs, and I would act very crazy. So they would make fun of me.”; title: “But did you forget the Lord?” interrupted Pastor Moses.; title: “Never!” replied Brother Benjamin. “The Lord was my only comfort. He was also my best friend.”; title: Then he finished his story by saying, “And I kept suffering for thirteen years until Joshua and John, the true men of God, came to give up their lives for me.”; title: Finally, everyone left the office, except Brother Noah, Pastor Moses and Joshua.; title: Then Brother Noah turned to Joshua and said, “So you’re going to stay with the Bakers for a week. Then, Brother Abraham has agreed to take you to spend the rest of the summer with them. In fact, he wanted to take you from the first week of the summer, but I want you to go and see your aunt’s family.”; title: “But how am I going to get there?” asked Joshua.; title: “Oh…” replied Brother Noah. “You’ll go to Ottawa with the rest of your friends in a flying building. From there, you’ll be taken to Hamilton in a flying car.”; title: “But what if they won’t let me stay with them?” asked Joshua, trying to challenge Brother Noah.; title: “If they don’t,” replied Brother Noah happily, “The driver will take you back to Ottawa to the Abrahams.; title: I also want to remind you that if they mistreat you, write a letter and send it to the Abrahams.”; title: “Oh…” replied Joshua. “I could send it to the Bobs, because they’re much closer than the Abrahams are. I’m sure that they will help.”; title: “Wonderful!” replied Brother Noah. Then he and Joshua left the office.; title: So Joshua went back to his section and told his friends everything that he talked about with Brother Noah.; title: Joshua was hoping in his heart that the Bakers wouldn’t let him stay with them. He didn’t know how they would treat him this time. Will they know all the great things that he did this year?; title: On June the twenty-fifth, which was the last day of school, there was a very big party at the restaurant.; title: Joshua and Emily sat together as usual. John and Sarah sat at the same table. Samuel and Emily Bob were also sitting there.; title: “So we’ll be leaving tomorrow?” Joshua asked Emily sadly.; title: “Yes…” she replied unhappily; title: The Devilists were not present at the party. They were celebrating in their own sections. Some of them were happy that Joshua and John were still alive, but others were very disappointed. They hoped to see Joshua and John dead.; title: Although all Devilists worshiped Satan, not all of them hated Christians. In fact, some of them liked living under Christian rule instead of Beelzebub.; title: At the party that night, there were some people whom Joshua had never met before. They included: Sister Miriam, who was the wife of Brother Noah, Sister Rahab, the wife of Pastor Moses and Sister Rebecca, who was the wife of Pastor Peter.; title: So Joshua and his friends went and sat with the new visitors.; title: “Do you live in this building?” Joshua asked all three women.; title: “Yes,” replied Sister Miriam. “But we go to the secular world to preach to women. We preach where women have no freedom.” So they told Joshua and his friends all about their job in the secular world.; title: Then, Brother Noah went to where the microphone was. He was about to give an important announcement.; title: “Ladies and gentlemen, we are celebrating the end of the school year. But what happened to Joshua and John cannot be forgotten. Their sacrifice to save Brother Benjamin cannot be forgotten. Therefore, an important person is with us today. Let us all welcome King Solomon!”; title: Everyone applauded as King Solomon entered the huge restaurant. His wife, Queen Esther, was with him. His daughter, Princess Dinah, was also present.; title: Joshua smiled at Emily and asked, “Where is the representative of the Devilists? Isn’t he coming to the party?”; title: “He’s probably afraid of you,” she laughed.; title: “I’m not that dangerous,” he said, “am I?”; title: “Well to the Devilists you are.” John laughed. He was sitting in front of Joshua. That’s why how he heard him.; title: Brother Noah called Joshua and John to the table where the king was sitting.; title: “Congratulations!” shouted King Solomon as Joshua and John sat beside him.; title: He wanted to hear the whole story. Therefore, they told him everything that had happened.; title: “Wow!” he looked amazed. “Our God is really great!; title: So he saved you because you were giving up your lives to free Brother Benjamin? See how powerful love is? Evil cannot stand love. That’s why you were saved. Our God is love and the devil is evil. So love defeated evil.”; title: There were many reporters and journalists at the party. So they interviewed both Joshua and John. Their story would be on the Jerusalemite news for few days.; title: “So where’s Mr. Satan?” Joshua asked the King after he finished talking to the journalists and the reporters.; title: “Well I didn’t invite him,” laughed King Solomon.; title: “That’s better!” laughed Joshua. “He’s probably very disappointed, because our God saved us from the power of Satan.”; title: “Well he should be disappointed,” laughed the king. “His name is ‘Satan,’ after all.”; title: After the party was over, Joshua and his three friends returned to their section. Then he asked John, “You told me that there are Canadians and Americans in this building. So who are Canadians and who are Americans?”; title: John looked at him and answered, “Well Brother Noah, Pastor Moses, Sarah and my family are all Canadians. Brothers Paul, James, Peter and the Adams are all Americans.; title: The problem, however, is not between Canadians and Americans, but it’s among Christians and Devilists.”; title: “In other words,” continued Emily, “The problem is between good and evil and between Christ and the devil.”; title: Joshua smiled at Sarah and asked, “So where are you from Canada?”; title: “From Alberta,” she smiled back.; title: “What about your family?” asked Joshua? “I mean, are they all Christians?”; title: She put her head down and replied, “I have no parents. The only relatives that I have left are my aunt’s house. But they mistreat me, just like your aunt.”; title: “Why do you go back to them every summer then?” asked Joshua, feeling sorry for her.; title: “I don’t go to them,” she replied, crying. “But I stay in a hotel.”; title: John was shocked to hear that she would stay in a hotel every summer. So he said, “We’ll take you with us!”; title: “Hallelujah!” shouted Emily. “I have a new brother and a new sister!”; title: “Not really brother,” laughed Joshua, because he knew that she was talking about him. “But I’m your…” He wanted to say “future husband,” but he stopped himself quickly.; title: The next morning, everyone was happy that school was over. Some of them, however, were sad, because they would be returning to the other world.; title: There were two things that made Joshua unhappy that morning. First, he would be leaving the best country in the world. Second, he would have to spend a whole week with the Bakers. He didn’t know whether they would treat him a little better or not.; title: “Well you’ll be coming back in September,” said John, as they were preparing their bags. These bags would be traveling in another flying building.; title: Suddenly, Tierney came into the room where he was. She wanted to say something very important, but she didn’t say it.; title: “Hi Joshua,” she said nervously. Then she went over to him and hugged him very tightly. She even kissed him.; title: She said, “Thank you for saving my life.” She was referring to when they were practicing how to fight against the demons in one of the Devilist sections.; title: “But I’ll see you next year, dear.”; title: Then he realized that she was in love with him. But he decided not to tell Emily about this.; title: Then, Sister Bianca came to him. She gave him a very big hug and said, “We’re returning to North Carolina now. But I haven’t forgotten your sacrifice to save my husband. So take care of yourself.” Then she did the same thing to John and left.; title: Finally, they all got into the flying building. As usual, they all sat in the same room.; title: Emily Bob said to Joshua, “Well if you need anything, send us your messenger. We’ll be very happy to help.”; title: “Can I come and see you every day?” asked Joshua thoughtfully. He said this because he knew how lonely with the Bakers he would be.; title: “Of course!” she replied, smiling. “But will the Bakers let you, though?”; title: “I’ll try and convince them…” he replied doubtfully.; title: Finally, the flying building stopped in Ottawa. So they all left.; title: Brother Noah was there waiting for Joshua. He would be taking him to Hamilton to stay with the Bakers.; title: So before he could leave, Emily gave him a very big hug and kissed him. She said, “I’ll see you in a week.” A week, however, was like seven centuries to Joshua.; title: John, Samson and Isaac all shook hands with Joshua.; title: Then Joshua got into Brother Noah’s flying car. As with all Jerusalemite cars, this car was flying on its own.; title: Joshua was very sad. He was thinking about all the good things that happened in the Holy Community Building. He would miss New Jerusalem a lot.; title: At last, they reached the Bakers house in Hamilton. So Brother Noah knocked on their door.; title: Mr. Baker opened the door.; title: “Hello, Mr. Baker,” said Brother Noah, holding out his hand to Mr. Baker. But he didn’t take it.; title: Then Brother Noah explained, “Well Joshua will be staying with you for a week. After that, one of our families will take him.”; title: Then he turned to Joshua and said, “Take care of yourself, okay?”; title: “Yes, sir,” replied Joshua sadly.; title: And that is the end of the first novel in the ‘New Jerusalem’ series. It is very sad to see that Joshua has returned to stay with his bad relatives. What do you think will happen next? You will see in the second book!